For more complete information on 19th Century Military Drill, visit the main page.

BACK to The Drill Network

Back to The Liberty Greys



SITE NAVIGATION

 

 

 

HAND-BOOK

 

FOR

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ACTIVE SERVICE;

 

CONTAINING

 

 

 

 

 

Practical Instructions in Campaign Duties.

 

 

 

 

 

FOR THE USE OF VOLUNTEERS.

 

 

 

 

BY

 

 

 

EGBERT L. VIELE,

LATE U. S. A.,

 

CAPTAIN ENGINEERS, SEVENTH REGIMENT, N. G.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NEW YORK:

 

D. VAN NOSTRAND,  192 BROADWAY.

1861

 

 

 

 

 

 

NEW YORK, 21st February, 1861.    

 

 

CAPTAIN E. L. VIELE,

                  Engineer, etc.

 

Sir:—I have read with great satisfaction, the advance sheets of the “Hand Book for Active Service” sent me. A practical work of this description is greatly needed, and will be prized by the sol­diers composing our militia throughout the States. Teaching the soldier bow to prepare his food in the most economical and expe­ditious manner is certainly not the least important part of your in­teresting volume. Knowledge thus disseminated will, in case of service in the field, save many lives, and add to the efficiency of the force, while the general information upon military subjects, given in a concise and familiar style, I doubt not will be highly appre­ciated.

   I am, my dear Sir,

                                   Your friend and servant,

                                         MARSHALL LEFFERTS,

Col. 7th Regiment, N. G.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PREFACE.

 

 

THERE are at this moment in the United States 3,000,000 of organized troops, all of them more or less accustomed to the use of arms, and many of them have been drilled in military tactics. Very few have been in actual service, and are therefore unaccustomed to the fatigues, and unacquainted with the duties, of camp and garrison life. Were any number of them to be brought suddenly into the field, this want of experience would be at once felt by officers as well as soldiers, and a great deal of useless labor, unnecessary privation, and per­sonal suffering would be gone through with before they would become sufficiently accustomed to the entire change in their mode of life. With a view to avoid these difficulties as much as possible, and set before the soldier in a familiar manner that line of conduct to be pursued in a campaign which would enable him to husband his physical resources and

 

 

8                                                                  PREFACE.

 

 

at the same time render him most effective in every way for any duty, these pages have been prepared; the author claiming no originality or merit beyond a desire to aid his fellow-citizens in acquiring more thorough information on the subject of military duties.

The large amount of intelligence and active energy which the volunteer brings with him into the field is frequently thrown away and wasted for the want of knowledge in daily routine, which, to­gether with a strict obedience to order, makes the chief value of the regular soldier. When this knowledge is once acquired, volunteers have in many respects the advantage over regular troops.

 

New York, March, 1861.

 

 

 

 

 

 

CONTENTS.

 

______________

 

 

 

CHAP.

    I.   INTRODUCTION,

   II.   THE RECRUIT,

  III.   THE COMPANY,

  IV.   THE REGIMENT,

   V.    THE MARCH,

  VI.   THE CAMP,

 VII.   GUARDS AND GUARD MOUNTING,

VIII.   RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM,

  IX.   FIELD FORTIFICATIONS,

   X.   ARTILLERY,

  XI.   MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY,

 XII.   MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY,

XIII.   AMMUNITION,

 

 

PAGE

11

15

28

37

48

57

65

75

92

149

157

178

250

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

 

___________

 

 

FORMATION OF A REGIMENT AND COMPANY

PLAN OF ENCAMPMENT, FOR A REGIMENT OF INFANTRY,

THE PORTABLE FIELD COOKING STOVE,

PROFILE AND OUTLINE OF A BASTION FRONT FIELD WORK,

REDAN, CREMAILLERE, LINE AND STAR FORTS,

MOUNTAIN HOWITZER AND LIMBER,

24-POUNDER ON A SIEGE CARRIAGE,

SIEGE MORTAR AND MORTAR-BED,

24-POUNDER ON A BARBETTE CARRIAGE,

8-INCH COLUMBIAD ON A CASEMATE CARRIAGE,

TO FACE PAGE

37

58

   90

 

93

102

137

182

216

222

244

 

         

         

 

 

HAND-BOOK FOR ACTIVE SERVICE.

 

_____________

 

 

CHAPTER 1.

 

INTR0DUCTION.

 

 

AN effective organization of troops for all purposes, is composed of three arms: Infantry, Cavalry, and Artil­lery. Upon a due proportion of each of these arms de-pends their capacity for attack or defence.

INFANTRY.—Experience has taught us that the most reliable arm under all circumstances is infantry; it is more capable of endurance, and of being maneuvred on every ground, even where the other arms would be ut­terly useless.

The proportion of this arm in a complete organiza­tion would be four-fifths of the entire force.

Infantry is subdivided into “Infantry of the Line,” “Light Infantry,” and Riflemen. The duties of each are distinct. In all engagement the Infantry of the Line bears the brunt of the battle; moving in mass when acting on the offensive, it delivers its fire in line, and overwhelms the enemy by its force and energy, driving him from his position at the point of the bayonet; and on the defensive it forms in square to repel the charge of cavalry, and

 

 

 

 

12                                                                INTRODUCTION.

 

 

 

upon the coolness and determination with which it re­ceives the shock of attack, depends its success; to waver is half a defeat.

The duties of light infantryare to act as flankers on the march, to open an engagement, to draw the enemy’s fire, to unmask his batteries, and generally to develop his strength and expose the weak points of his position, to feign attacks, and in every way to annoy, worry, and dis­comfit him. They are selected for picket and out post duty, advance and rearguard. The French Zouave is the best model of a light infantry soldier.

The efficiency of riflemen depends upon the locality at which they are posted; if so placed that they can de­liver their fire with deliberation and precision, they be­come most valuable auxiliaries, and are often able to hold their position against a vastly superior force. They should be selected from those who are known as good shots, otherwise their principal value would be lost.

CAVALRY.—Cavalry is placed second in importance to infantry, although modern warfare has developed such perfection in artillery, that it has in many instances turned the tide of battle, and saved the other arms from a crush­ing defeat. Well-drilled cavalry, however, saves the strength of an army, which, in the absence of it, would be broken down by the advanced post duties, patrol and de­tachment service, and many other duties which, at the best, infantry would but be able imperfectly to perform. Its chief value is felt when the infantry is exhausted by fatigue; coming freshly upon the ground in an engage­ment, it gives the other troops time to recover their strength, and the commands to reform. The nature of country in which a - campaign is undertaken, determines the relative proportion of cavalry to infantry. In an open country, the cavalry can be increased with advantage. As

 

 

 

          INTRODUCTION.                                                            13

 

a general rule, however, one regiment of cavalry to four regiments of foot is a proper proportion, since cavalry, unless well supported by infantry, would at times be utterly powerless and unable to protect itself. To render it perfect, it should be composed of strong, skilful, bold and reckless riders, well-trained and well-built horses, so that, dashing forward on an instant, and moving with celerity upon the enemy, it rides him down before he has time to prepare to meet the shock.

ARTILLERY.—Artillery is an arm of great power, and in skilful hands the most effective arm of the service; it inspires confidence in the troops, and if the fire is de­livered with precision and rapidity, it is next to impossible to withstand it. On the other hand, if not well supported by infantry, it falls readily into the enemy’s hands, giving him an immense advantage in an instant. To this end, care should be taken not to have it out of proportion to the arias. Two batteries of six (6-pounders) field pieces to one division or four foot regiments, will generally be found a due proportion. When the character of the ground is favorable, the nature of the service may re­quire an increase of the artillery to three batteries. Upon this basis, then, an effective organization or army corps would be composed of about 5,000 men:

2 regiments of infantry of the line              1000 each

1 regiment of light infantry                         1000
   1 regiment of riflemen                                1000
   1 regiment of cavalry                                   1000

   2 batteries (six pieces) of artillery, or 4 batteries of     

        4 pieces if mountain howitzers are used.

 

This disposition of the several arms is predicated upon the supposition that the troops are welt drilled and disciplined, since the whole value of the arrangement is dependent on this discipline, hence the necessity, in the

 

 

 

 

14                                                          INTRODUCTION.

 

case of volunteer forces brought suddenly into active ser­vice, of making up for their want of experience by a close attention to the leading points of military instruction. For this purpose, the following paragraphs have been so arranged that each soldier can follow step by step, the necessary course of’ instruction, and the duties which will devolve upon him.

An intelligent mind becomes restive under the routine of the daily drill, unless it can appreciate the object to be gained by such discipline. By setting before the volun­teer the whole theory of army organization, it is believed that he will the more readily comprehend the great value of discipline in sustaining that organization, and under such impulses will arrive more rapidly at proficiency in drill, and yield a more ready obedience to orders. The minor details which are most generally learned in the field, are after all the most important to the personal health, comfort, and efficiency of the troops; and the sooner the volunteer becomes acquainted with these de­tails, the sooner will he be fitted for the active and ardu­ous duties of a campaign.

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER II.

 

 

THE RECRUIT.

 

 

THE patriotic desire of’ every good citizen to serve his country, is the natural result of’ our form of government. Yet it is absolutely impossible for every man to perform all the duties of a soldier, no matter what may be his nat­ural impulses; and to fill the ranks by accepting the ser­vices of all that offer themselves, would jeopardize the best interests of the service, and in many eases would impede, if’ not frustrate, the very objects of a campaign. Hence, there devolves upon the officer who recruits or organizes a company of men for active service, avery large share of responsibility; his duty to the individual who offers, no less than to the service he seeks to enter, compels him to exercise the wisest discretion in the selec­tion of his men. Even where a company of’ volunteers already organized in time of peace is called upon to take the field, each man should be submitted to a critical medical examination, and if’ there is any defect hi his physi­cal organization which would render him unfit to with­stand the fatigues of an active campaign, or any evidence of’ a susceptibility to disease, he should be rejected without hesitation.

 

“An able-bodied soldier” should be of good character, sound in body and mind, of’ good appearance, well formed,

 

 

16                                                             THE RECRUIT.

 

 

and fit in every particular to perform the duties required of him; he should be over 18 years of age and under 40, and the greatest care should be taken to inform him with regard to the nature of his duties, the term of service, pay, clothing, rations, and other allowances, before he is finally received into the service. This will prevent re­gret and dissatisfaction, and secure efficiency.

 

 

“THE SQUAD”

 

 

As fast as the men are enrolled, they should be in­structed three times a day in the school of the soldier: much of a soldier’s subsequent efficiency depends upon his first “setting up.”

For the purpose of instruction, the companies are di­vided into “squads” of 10, and are first drilled in the “Position of a Soldier.” Formed in one rank, about one pace apart, the instructor places them in position as fol­lows:

 

POSITION OF THE SOLDIER.

 

Heels on the same line, and as close together as the conformation of the man may permit; the feet forming with each other something less than a right angle, the toes equally turned out; the knees straight, without stiffness; the body erect on the hips, the upper part inclining a little forward; the shoulders square and falling equally; arms hanging naturally, elbows near the body, the palm of the hand turned a little to the front, the little finger behind the seam of the pantaloons, or the centre of the thigh; the face well to the front, the chin a little drawn in without constraint, and the eyes striking the ground at the distance of fifteen paces.

                  

 

 

  THE RECRUIT.                                                                17

 

Remarks on the Position of the Soldier.

 

Heels on the same line;

 

Because, if one were in rear ofthe other, the shoulder on that side would be thrown back, or the position of the soldier would be constrained.

 

Heels more or less closed;

 

Because, men who are knock-kneed, or who have legs with large calves, cannot, without constraint, make their knees touch while standing.

 

Toes equally turned out, and not forming too large an angle;

 

Because, if one toe were turned out more than the other, a shoulder would be deranged, and if both toes be too much turned out, it would not be practicable to indine the upper part of the body forward without rendering the whole position unsteady.

 

Knees extended without stiffness;

 

Because, if stiffened, constraint and fatigue would be unavoidable.

The body erect on the hips;

 

Because, it gives equilibrium to the position. The instructor will observe that many recruits have the bad habit of dropping a shoulder, of drawing in a side, or of advancing a hip, particularly the left, when under arms. These arc defects which he will labor to correct.

 

The upper part of the body inclining forward;

 

Because, commonly recruits are disposed to do the reverse, to project the belly, and to throw back the shoul­ders when they wish to hold themselves erect—great in­conveniences in marching as will be explained in the remarks on the principles of the step. The habit of in­clining forward the upper part of the body is so impor­tant to contract, that the instructor must enforce it at the

 

 

18                                                               THE RECRUIT.

 

beginning, particularly with recruits who have naturally the opposite habit;

Shoulders square;

 

Because, if the shoulders be advanced beyond the line of the breast, and the back arched, (the defect called round-shouldered, not uncommon among recruits,) the man cannot align himself nor use his musket with address. It is important, then, to correct this defect, and necessary to that end that the coat should set easy about the shoul­ders and arm-pits; but, in correcting this defect, the in­structor will take care that the shoulders be not thrown too much to the rear, which would cause the belly to project, and the small of the back to be curved.

The arms hanging naturally, elbows near the body, the palm of the hand a little turned to the front, the little Linger behind the seam of the pantaloons;

 

Because, these positions are equally important to the shoulder-arms, and to prevent the man from occupying more space in a rank than is necessary to a free use of the musket; they have, moreover, the advantage of keep­ing in the shoulders.

 

The face well to the front, the chin a little drawn in, without constraint;

 

Because, if there be stiffness in the latter position, it would communicate itself to the whole of the upper part of the body, embarrass its movements, and give pain and fatigue.    

 

Eyes cast direct to the front;

 

Because, this is the surest means of maintaining the shoulders in line—an essential object, to be insisted on and attained.

Too much attention cannot be paid to this first lesson in tactics, and the drill officer should be constantly on the watch throughout the whole progress of instruction, in the

 

 

                 THE RECRUIT.                                                              19

 

use of arms, company and battalion drills, that every man should always maintain “the position of the soldier.”

 

ARM EXERCISE.

 

In order to accustom the recruit more readily to the position of a soldier, and at the same time to render him more supple for acquiring a proficiency in the manual of arms—the following exercises should precede the regular drill. Formed in one rank at one pace apart, the in­structor will give the command:

 

Arms—UPWARD.

 

One time and two motions.

 

First motion.—Bring the forearms to a vertical posi­tion, the fingers closed, and hands against the right and left breasts.

Second motion.—Extend the arms vertically over the head, open the fingers and place the palms together.

 

Arms—DOWNWARD.

 

One time and two motions.

 

First motion.—Bring the arms to the first position of arms upward.

Second motion.—Drop the hands with force to the side.

 

Arms—FORWARD.

 

One time and motion.

 

Extend the arms horizontally in front, of the body, the palms of the hands touching.

 

Arms—DOWNWARD.

 

One time and two motions, as before.

 

 

20                                                           THE RECRUIT.

 

Arms—BACKWARD.

 

One time and one motion.

Carry the hands behind the body, the palms touching.

 

 

Arms—FRONT.

 

Carry the hands quickly to the side.

 

Arms —SIDEWAYS.

 

One time and one motion.

 

Extend the arms horizontally to the right and left.

 

Arms—DOWNWARD.

As before.

 

The instructor will now command in rapid succession, Arms sideways! forward! upward! downward! backward! front! all of which will be executed as directed. By continuing this exercise for 10 or 15 minutes at the commencement of every drill without arms, a remarkable improvement will soon be observed in the carriage of the men.

 

SALUTING.

 

Saluting with the right or left hand is executed in one time and four motions. The instructor commands:

 

Right hand—SALUTE.

 

First motion.—Extendthe arm horizontally to the

right, palm down.

Second motion.—Carry the hand to the visor of the cap.

Third motion.—Carry the arm back to the horizontal position.

Fourth motion.—Drop the hand quickly to the side.

 

 

 

               THE RECRUIT.                                                        21

 

 

Left hand—SALUTE.

 

The same as for the right.

The salute should always be made with the hand op­posite to the person saluted.

Having thoroughly impressed upon the men the above rules, the instructor commands:

 

1. Eyes—Right. 2. Front.

 

At the word right, the soldier will turn his head gen­tly, so as to bring the inner corner of the left eye in a line with the buttons of’ the coat, the eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men in the same rank. At the command front, the head will resume the direct or habitual position. The instructor will take care that the movement of the head does not derange the squareness of the shoulders, and that the men do not acquire a habit of throwing down the head in dressing.

 

The movement of Eyes—Left, will be executed by inverse means.

 

 

FACINGS.

 

Facing to the right and left will he executed in one time, or pause. The instructor commands

 

I. Squad. 2. Right (or left)—FACE.

 

At the word face, raise the rig/ti foot slightly, turn on the left heel, to the right, (or left,) raising the left toe a little, mid then replace the right heel beside the left, and on the same line. The face should always be through a light angle, and should be executed by the feet and legs, the body moving around to the right (or left) without twisting or constraint. The instructor should labor to keep the body steady, and to prevent the formation of the habit of bending the knees, or springing.

 

 

22                                                             THE RECRUIT.

 

The full face to the rear is always to the right, and is executed in two times, or pauses. The instructor com— mands:

1.  Squad. 2. ABOUT—FACE.

 

First motion.—At the word about, the soldier will turn far enough on the left heel to bring the left too di­rectly to the front, and the same time carrying his right foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and full three inches from the left heel, the feet square to each other. The back of the right hand is placed a little above the right hip, and the body is turned to the right sufficiently to give ease to the position.

Second motion.—At the word face, the soldier raises his toes a little, turns upon both heels, faces to the rear, keeping his legs straight, and draws back the right heel by the side of the left, at the same time dropping his right hand by his side.

 

 

 

 

BALANCE STEP.

 

Before commencing the march the soldier should al­ways be instructed in the balance step, the object of which is to teach him the free movements of his limbs, while he at the same time preserves perfect squareness of the shoul­ders, with the greatest steadiness of the body; no labor should be spared to attain this object, which lies at the very foundation of good marching.

The squad being at attention, the instructor commands:

Left foot—FORWARD.

At this command the soldier will throw his left foot gently forwards, about twenty-four inches, balancing his body well on the right foot without changing the position of the shoulders, and without the body losing its erect

 

 

 

               THE RECRUIT.                                                           23

 

position. The toe should be turned out as in the position of the soldier, the foot about three inches from the ground and very nearly parallel to it, the toe being very slightly depressed.

At the command:

Left foot—REAR.

 

The left foot is brought gently back, the ball of the left foot close to the right heel, the leg straight, toe raised, and heel depressed.

As soon as the soldier becomes steady in the new po-sition, the instructor repeats the command, left foot for­ward, then left foot rear, for several times, and then commands

HALT;

 

at which the left foot, either advanced or to the rear, is brought to the right, as in the position of the soldier.

The instructor then causes the soldier to balance on the left foot, by advancing and retiring the right, as has been directed for the left.

 

 

THE DIRECT STEP.

 

After the soldier is sufficiently instructed in the bal­ance step to execute it on either foot without losing his balance, the instructor will proceed to instruct him in the mechanism of the direct step. For this purpose he will command:

1. By the numbers—Forward. 2. ONE.

 

At the command, one, the soldier will throw forward the left foot as in the position of left foot forward, the in­structor then commands

Two.

At this command, the weight of the body is thrown

 

 

 

24                                                              THE RECRUIT.

 

forward, the left foot striking the ground without shock, at the distance of twenty-eight inches from the right; the body assumes the perpendicular position, and the right foot is brought up to the position of right foot rear.

The right foot is then brought forward at the com­mand one, and the step completed at the command two; thus the squad is made to advance step by step. The halt is executed as in the balance step.

When the squad is sufficiently instructed in the me­chanism of the direct step, the instructor will cause it to take up the march in common time; for this purpose he will command:

 

1.   Squad forward— Common time. 2. MARCH.

 

At the command forward, the soldier will throw the weight of his body on the right leg, without bending the left knee.

At the command march, he will smartly, but without a jerk, carry straight forward the left foot twenty-eight inches from the right, the sole near the ground, the leg extended, the toe a little depressed, and both it and the knee slightly turned out; he will at the same time throw the weight of the body forward, and plant flat the left foot, without shock, precisely at the distance where it finds itself from the right when the weight of the body is brought forward, the whole of which will now rest on the left foot. The soldier will next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as directed for the left, the heel twenty-eight inches from the heel of the left foot, and thus continue the march without crossing the legs, or striking one against the other, without turning the shoulders, and always preserving the face direct to the front. Common time is executed at the rate of ninety steps to the minute.

 

 

v

 

 

 

THE RECRUIT.                                                      25      

 

When the instructor wishes to arrest the march, he commands:

1. Squad. 2. HALT.

The command halt, should be given just as one foot has come to the ground, and the other is raised for making the next step; the soldier instinctively completes the pace with the raised foot, and brings the other firmly to its place beside it. By careful attention to this rule a large command may as readily be halted at the same in­stant, as a single individual.

The principles of the step in quick time are the same as for common time; it is executed, however, at the rate of 110 steps per minute. After the soldier is well estab­lished in the length and swiftness of the step at common time, he should he practised in quick time, as it is the pace best adapted to marches, the maneuvres, etc.

The instructor wishing the squad to march in quick tune, commands:

1. Squad forward. 2. MARCH.

 

 

 

PRINCIPLES OF THE DOUBLE QUICK STEP.

 

 

The length of the double quick step is thirty-three inches, and its swiftness is at the rate of 165 steps per minute. This step is designed especially for light troops, such as light infantry and riflemen, and to them it is in­dispensable; its utility has, however, been so frequently demonstrated of late years, as to make it proper that it should form a part of the instruction of all infantry troops.

The instructor wishing to teach his squad the prin­ciples and mechanism of the double quick step, com­mands:

1. Double quick step. 2. MARCH.

 

 

 

 

26                                                                 THE RECRUIT.

 

At the· command double quick step, the soldier will raise his hands to a level with his hips, the hands closed, the nails towards the body, the elbows to the rear, and well drawn in towards the body.

At the command march, he will raise his left knee as high as possible without derangement of the body, keep­ing his leg from the knee down in a vertical position, the toe depressed; he will then replace his foot in its former position. At the command two, he will execute with the right leg what has just been prescribed for the left, and the alternate movement of the legs at the command one, two, will be continued until the command:

 

1. Squad. 2. HALT.

 

At the command halt, the soldier will bring the foot which is raised by the side of the other, and at the same time dropping his bands by his side will resume the posi­tion of the soldier without arms.

When the squad has learned to execute the step prop­erly, the instructor will repeat the words one, two, in more rapid succession, and will finally drop them, leaving the files to execute the step in their own time.. The in­structor will see that the step is taken in rapid succession, and that none of the files lose the step.

The soldier being sufficiently established in the prin­ciples of this step, the instructor will command:

 

I.    Squad forward. 2. Double quick. 3. MARCH.

 

At the command forward, the soldier will throw the weight of his body on the right leg, without bending the left knee.

At the command double quick, he will place his arms as indicated above.

At the command march, he will carry forward the left

 

 

 

          THE RECRUIT.                                                              27

 

foot, and plant it, the toe first, at the distance of thirty-three inches from the right, the leg slightly bent, and the knee somewhat raised; lie will then execute with the right foot what has just been prescribed for the left. This alternate movement of the legs will take place by throwing the weight of the body on the foot that is planted, and by allowing a natural, oscillatory motion to the arms. The feet should not be raised too much, a common fault with beginners, and the body should incline slightly forward.

The double quick step may be executed with different degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circumstances, the cadence of this step may be increased to 180 per minute. At this rate a distance of 4,000, yards should be passed over in about twenty-five minutes.

The men should also be exercised in running; the principles are the same as for the double quick step, the only difference consisting in a greater degree of swiftness.

It is recommended in marching in double quick time, or the run, that the men should breathe as much as pos­sible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed.

 

Note.—The Manual of Arms is the next step of instruction in the school of the soldier; for this Tactics willbe referred to, as the brevity of this work will not admit of its insertion.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER. III.

 

THE COMPANY.

 

 

In an organization, the smallest number complete in itself is the company, which varies in number from 50 to 100 rank and file.

Note.—The general principles of organization are the same for all arms. The variation in the Cavalry will be referred to, and that for Artillery will be found in the Manual for Light and Heavy Guns.

 

A captain, two or more lieutenants, from four to six sergeants, and as many corporals, are attached to every company. The captain and lieutenants are the officers, and the sergeants and corporals the non-commissioned officers of the company.

The captain is responsible for the instruction, disci­pline, general efficiency, and moral tone of the company.

The lieutenants assist the captain in the maintenance of discipline, and in the instruction.

The company is divided into two equal parts, which are designated as the first and second platoon, counting from the right; and each platoon is, in like manner, divided into two sections.

The company is formed into two ranks in the follow­ing manner: the corporals on the right and left of pla­toons, according to height; the tallest corporal and the

 

 

          THE COMPANY.                                                         29

 

 

tallest man from the first file on the right, the next two tallest men from the second file, and so on to the last file, which is composed of the shortest corporal and the short­est man.

The odd and even files, numbered as one, two, in the company, from right to left, form groups of four men, who, when they act as light troops, are designated com­rades in battle.

The officers and non-commissioned officers of the com­pany are posted in the following manner:

The captain, on the right of the company, touching with the left elbow.

The first sergeant, in the rear rank, touching with the left elbow, and covering the caption. In the maneuvres he is denominated covering sergeant, or right guide of the company.

The remaining officers and sergeants are posted as file­closers, in the rank of file closer’s, two paces behind the rear rank.

The first lieutenant, opposite the centre of the fourth section.

The second lieutenant, opposite the centre of the first platoon.

The third lieutenant, opposite the centre of the second platoon.

The second sergeant, opposite the second file from the left of the company. In the maneuvres, he is called the left guide of the company.

The third sergeant, opposite the second file from the right of the second platoon.

The fourth sergeant, opposite the second file from the leff of the first platoon.

The fifth sergeant, opposite the second file from the right of the first platoon.

 

 

 

 

30                                                            THE COMPANY.

 

 

The corporals are posted in the front rank.

The company in cavalry is denominated the troop; it is organized upon the same principles as that of infantry; its habitual formation is in two ranks.

When the company is in line, and acting singly, the officers and non-commissioned officers are posted as fol­lows

The captain in front of the centre, one pace from the front rank.

The first lieutenant in rear of the centre, in the rank of file-closers.

The second lieuienant commands the first platoon; in the absence of a third lieutenant, the second platoon is commanded by the senior sergeant. The chiefs of platoons are posted one pace in front of the centres of their re­spective platoons.

The first sergeant in rear of the right, in the rank of file-closers.

The second and third sergeants on the right and left of the company, and denominated the guide of the right, and guide of the left, respectively.

The fourth sergeant is on the left of the first platoon, in the front rank, and counted in the rank; the fifth ser­geant is in a corresponding position on the right of the second platoon.

Corporals on the flanks of platoons.

Buglers twenty paces in rear of the centre.

Two companies of cavalry united constitute a squad­ron. Each squadron is composed of four platoons, distin­guished by the denomination of first, second, third, and fourth, commencing on the right.

The first and second platoons form the first division, the third and fourth form the second division.

The senior captain of the squadron is denominated the

 

 

 

 

 

          THE COMPANY.                                                         31

 

captain commanding, the junior captain the second cap­tain.

When the squadron is in line, the officers and non­commissioned officers are posted as follows:

The captain commanding at the centre of the squadron, the croup of his horse one pace in front of the heads of the horses of the front rank.

The second captain three paces in rear of the centre of the squadron. lie is charged with the alignment of the rear rank and line of file-closers.

The senior first lieutenant commands the first platoon; the junior first lieutenant commands the fourth platoon.

The senior second lieutenant commands the second platoon; the junior second lieutenant commands the third platoon.

Each of these officers is posted at the centre of his platoon, with the croup of his horse one pace in front of the heads of the horses of the front rank.

The senior sergeant is posted behind the first file from the right of the first platoon; he is the principal guide when the column of squadrons is left in front.

The second sergeant is behind the third file from the left of the fourth platoon; he is principal guide when the column of squadrons is right in front.

The third sergeant is posted on the right of the front rank of the squadron; he is the guide of the right, and is not counted in the rank.

The fourth sergeant on the left of the front rank; he is guide of the left, and not counted in the rank.

The fifth sergeant on the left of the first platoon, and counted in the rank.

The sixth sergeant on the right of the second platoon, also counted in the rank.

The seventh sergeant on the right of the third platoon;

 

 

 

 

 

 

32                                                             THE C0MPANY.

 

 

the eighth sergeant on the right of the fourth platoon— both are counted in the rank.

The heads of the horses of the file-closers are at one pace from the croup of those of the rear rank.

The corporals are in the front rank, on the right and left of their respective platoons, and supply the places of sergeants when necessary.

When guidons are used, they are carried by the non­commissioned officers on the left of the first and third platoons.

As the company is the unit of a military organization, the efficiency of that organization depends upon the effi­ciency of the unit; and the captain or commanding officer of a company should always bear in mind that there is no position in the service, second iii importance to his, lie should be thoroughly familiar with tactics. He should strive to acquaint himself with the individual character and habits of his men, so as to know how much he can depend upon them; and to be able to make from them a selection of any number at any time for important ser­vice. While he is personally responsible for the proper care and preservation of the arms and accoutrements, ho should also feel himself responsible for the proper cloth­ing and diet of his men. In order the more effectively to carry out a rigid supervision of the personal conduct and comfort of the men, he will cause them to be numbered in a regular series, including the non-commissioned officers, and divided into several squads, each to be put under the charge of a non-commissioned officer. As far as practicable, the men of each squad should be quartered together.

Each of the lieutenants is charged with a squad for the supervision of its order and cleanliness; and captains should require their subalterns to assist them in the per­formance of all company duties.

 

 

 

 

 

          THE COMPANY.                                                            33

 

The utmost attention should be paid by captains to the cleanliness of their men, as to their persons, clothing, arms, accoutrements, and equipments, and also as to their quarters or tents.

The name of each soldier should be labelled on his bunk in quarters, and his company number should be placed against his arms and accoutrements.

The arms are placed in arm-racks, the stoppers in the muzzles, the cocks let down, and the bayonets in their scabbards, the accoutrements suspended over the arms, and the swords or sabres, when these are worn, hung up by the belts on pegs.

The knapsack of each man should be placed at the foot of his bunk when lie is in quarters, packed with his effects, and ready to be slung; the overcoat rolled, strap­ped, and placed under the knapsack; the cap on a shelf, and his boots well cleaned. Dirty clothes should be kept in an appropriate part of the knapsack; nothing to be put under the bedding.

Cooking utensils and table furniture should be clean, and in their appropriate places; blacking and brushes out of sight; the fuel in boxes.

The cleaning up should ‘take place at least once a week. The chiefs of squads should cause bunks and bed­ding to be overhauled, floors cleaned, and arms, accoutre­ments, etc., all put in order.

Non-commissioned officers in charge of squads, should be held immediately responsible that their men observe what is prescribed above; that they wash their hands and faces daily; that they brush or comb their heads and beards; that those who go on duty put their arms, accou­trements, dress, etc., in the best order.

Commanders of companies should see that the arms and accoutrements in possession of the men are always

 

 

 

 

 

34                                                          THE C0MPANY.

 

kept in good order, and that proper care is taken in clean­ing them.

Arms should not be taken to pieces without permission of an officer. Bright barrels should ho kept clean and free from rust, without polishing them; care should be taken not to bruise or bend the barrel. After firing, wash out the bore, wipe it dry, and then pass a bit of cloth, slightly greased, to the bottom. In these operations, a rod of wood with a loop on one end is to be used instead of the ram­mer. The barrel, when not in use, should be closed with a stopper. For exercise each man should keep himself provided with a piece of sole leather to fit the cap or countersink of the hammer, to prevent breaking the nipple.

All field pieces in the possession of artillery companies should be kept clean and dry; their vents frequently examined, to se that they are clear; the elevating screw wiped clean, worked, and oiled. When tarpaulins are placed over them, they should occasionally be removed, the guns and carriages brushed off and, if damp, allowed to dry.

The implements should all be kept clean and under cover, the harness and leather articles should be brushed and greased with neats fool oil as often as their condition requires it, and if they have a reddish hue, mix a little lampblack with the oil. First brush the leather, then pass over it a sponge wet with warm water, and apply the oil before the leather is quite dry.

Arms should not be left loaded in armories, quarters, or tents, or when the men are off duty, except by special orders. The ammunition in the possession of the men should be inspected frequently, and any damaged, wasted, or lost by neglect, should be paid for.

Knapsacks should be black; they should be marked on the outside with the number of the regiment, and on

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

          THE C0MPANY.                                                           35

 

 

the inside with the letter of the company, and the number of the soldier, on such part as will readily be seen at in­spections.

Haversacks should be marked on the flap with the number and name of the regiment, the letter of the com­pany, and the number of the soldier.

Both officers and men should wear the prescribed uni­form in camp or garrison.

In camp or quarters, the officers should visit the kitch­en daily and inspect the kettles, food, etc., and at all times carefully attend to the messing and economy of their com­panies.

The company rations are usually taken charge of by the orderly sergeant, and issued daily to the cooks, by whom they are prepared and served to the company. The men of the company serve in turn as cooks, two being the usual number serving at once. When in camp, the men present themselves at meal times to the cooks, who issue to each man in turn his proper allowance; in garrison or quarters the tables are set out, and the cooks place each man’s ration on his plate, and in his cup, before the com­pany is marched in.

When not actually in the field the ration is in most cases more than sufficient, so that by care on the part of the orderly sergeant and cooks, there is more or less saved on the rations of the company; this saving is sold for the benefit of the company, and constitutes what is denomi­nated company fund.

When a militia company is enrolled for active service the captain should, at the earliest possible moment, have it properly uniformed and equipped, and taught how to take care of its arms, clothing, etc.; each man should be provided with his knapsack, haversack, blanket, knife and fork, spoon, tin plate, and cup.

 

 

 

 

 

36                                                            THE COMPANY.

 

 

Canteens are also necessary in most cases they are worn over the haversack.

Each man should also be provided with the following articles

Two woollen undershirts.

Two pair thick cotton drawers.

Four pair woollen socks,

Two pair stout shoes, with broad, thick soles, for footmen.

One pair boots, and one pair shoes for horsemen.

In starting out on a campaign, an amount of clothing equal at least to one-fourth the strength of the company, should be transported with the company’s equipments. The uniform for active service should consist of a simple fatigue dress of durable material, a plain and substantial overcoat with a cape, and a forage cap.

 

 

COMPANY B00KS.

 

 

Every company should be provided with

1. A morning report book, showing the strength of the company every morning, the number for duty, the number sick, and all the casualties that may occur.

2. A clothing book, showing the clothing issued to each man, the date of issue, and price.

3. A roster, arranged in alphabetical order, from which the details for guard duty and other service are made, each man being credited with his tour, and the duty fairly distributed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

 

CHAPTER IV.

 

THE REGIMENT.

 

 

A REGIMENT is composed of ten companies, which are habitually posted from right to left, in the following order first, sixth, fourth, ninth, third, eighth, fifth, tenth, seventh, second, according to the rank of the captain. With a less number of companies the same principle will be observed, viz. the first captain commands the right company, the second captain the left company, the third captain the right centre company, and so on.

The companies thus posted are designated from right to left, first company, second company, etc. This designa­tion is observed in all the maneuvres.

The first two companies on the right, whatever their denomination, form the first division; the next two com­panies the second division; and so on to the left.

In alt exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment, or part of a regiment, composed of two or more companies, is called a battalion.

Every regiment is provided with a color, which is posted with its guard, to be designated hereafter, on the left of the right centre company; that company, and all on its right, belongs to the right wing of the regiment, or battalion; the remaining companies constitute the left wing.

 

 

 

38                                                            THE REGIMENT.

 

 

To each regiment are attached a colonel, who com­mands it, and is responsible for its general discipline and instruction; a lieutenant-colonel, two majors, a quarter­master, commissary, paymaster, surgeon, and frequently an assistant surgeon, an adjutant, sergeant-major, quarter­master-sergeant, and commissary sergeant. The four first named of these officers are the field officers of the regi­ment; the others constitute its commissioned and non­commissioned staff.

 

POSTS OF FIELD OFFICERS AND REGIMENTAL STAFF.

 

The field officers are supposed to be mounted, and on active service must be on horseback; the adjutant, when the battalion is maneuvring, is on foot; when on the march, or in action, he is mounted

The colonel’s post is thirty paces in rear of the file­closers, and opposite the centre of the battalion. The lieutenant-colonel and senior major are behind the centres of the right and left wing respectively, the junior major behind the centre of the battalion, all twelve paces in rear of the file-closers.

The adjutant and sergeant-major are opposite the right and left of the battalion respectively, and eight paces in rear of the file-closers. They assist the lieu­tenant-colonel and major, respectively, in the maneuvres.

The quartermaster, surgeon, and other staff officers, are in one rank on the left of the colonel, and three paces in his rear. The quartermaster-sergeant is on a line with the front rank of the field music, and two paces on its right.

 

PIONEERS, FIELD MUSICS AND BAND.

 

The pioneers (one for each company) are drawn up in two ranks, and posted on the right, having their left

 

 

 

      THE REGIMENT.                                                          39

 

 

four paces from the right of the first company. A cor­poral of pioneers, selected from the corporals by the colonel, is posted on the right of the pioneers.

The field music (two musicians to each company) is drawn up in four ranks, and posted twelve paces in rear of the file-closers, the left opposite the centre company.

The principal musician is two paces in front of the field music. The regimental band, (not to exceed sixteen musicians,) if there be one, is drawn up in two or four ranks, according to its numbers, and posted five paces in rear of the field music, having a principal musician at its head.

 

COLOR GUARD.

 

The color guard of a regiment or battalion is composed of eight corporals, posted on the left of the right centre company, of which company, for the time being, the guard forms a part.

The front rank is composed of a sergeant selected by the colonel, who is called the color-bearer, with the two ranking corporals on his right and left; the rear rank is composed of the three corporals next in rank; the three remaining corporals are posted in rear in the rank of file-­closers. The left guide of the color company, when the three last named corporals are in the rank of file-closers, is immediately on their left.

In battalions of less than five companies, there should be no color guard, and no display of colors, except at re­views.

 

GENERAL GUIDES AND MARKERS.

 

There should be two general guides in each battalion, selected by the colonel from among the sergeants (other than first sergeants) for their accuracy in marching. These. sergeants are denominated right and left general guide,

 

 

 

40                                                          THE REGIMENT.

 

 

respectively, and are posted in the line of file-closers; the first in rear of the right, and the second in rear of the left flank of the battalion.

Three markers are required to every battalion; they are posted behind the first company in the rank of file-closers, when the battalion is in line, and behind the lead­ing company or division whenever it is in column.

 

 

TO FORM THE REGIMENT OR BATTALION.

 

At the signal, called the adjutant’s call, the companies are marched from the company parades by their captains, the music playing. The color company serves as the basis of the formation, and is the first to form; the color guard being at the point where the centre of the line is to rest, one marker is placed in front of it, his elbow touching the right corporal of the color guard, and another on the line at a little less than company distance from him, on his right, and facing towards him; the color company is halted three paces behind this line, faced to the front, and dressed up upon the line by the captain, who aligns it to the left.

The company on the left of the color is the next to take its post; it is halted three paces behind the line, its right nearly behind the left file of the color guard, and faced to the front. As soon as it halts, the left guide of the company throws himself out, so as to be opposite one of the three left files of the company, faces to the right, and aligns himself upon the two markers; the captain then places himself on the left of the color guard, on a line with its front rank, and aligns the company to the right. The company on the right of the colors forms next upon the same principles; the right guide posts himself upon the line opposite one of the three right files of the company,

 

 

 

 

               THE REGIMENT.                                                           41

 

and faces to the left; the captain places himself on the right

of the color company, and aligns his company to the left.

The remaining companies take their posts on the left and right in succession, and when the formation is com­plete, the adjutant commands, Guides post; at this command the guides on the line retire to their places by passing through the intervals between the companies, and those captains who are on the left of their companies shift to the right.

 

 

DRESS PARADE.

 

There shall be daily one dress parade, at troop or re­treat, as the commanding officer may direct.

A signal will be beat or sounded half an hour before troop or retreat, for the music to assemble on the regi­mental parade, and each company to turn out under arms on its own parade, for roll-call and inspection by its officers.

Ten minutes after that signal, the adjutant’s call will be given, when the captains will march their companies (the band playing) to the regimental parade, where they take their positions in line as directed. When the line is formed, the captain of the first company, on notice from the adjutant, steps one pace to the front, and gives to his company the command, Order arms; parade; rest; which is repeated by each captain in succession to the left. The adjutant takes post two paces on the right of the line; the sergeant-major two paces on the left. The music will be formed in two ranks on the right of the adjutant The senior officer present will take the command of the parade, and will take post at a suitable distance in front, opposite the centre, facing the line.

When the companies have ordered arms, the adjutant will order the music to beat off, when it will commence

 

 

 

 

 

42                                                             THE REGIMENT.

 

 

on the right, beat in front of the line to the left, and back to its place on the right.

When the music has ceased, the adjutant will step two paces to the front, face to the left, and command:

I.    Attention. 2. Battalion. 3. Shoulder—ARMS.

Prepare to open ranks. 5. To the rear open order

6. MARCH.

At the sixth command, the ranks will be opened ac- cording to the system laid down in the Infantry Tactics, the commissioned officers marching to the front, the com­pany officers four paces, field officers six paces, opposite to their positions in the order of battle, whore they will halt and dress. The adjutant, seeing the ranks aligned, will command:

FRONT.

 

and march along the front to the centre, face to the right, and pass the line of’ company officers eight or ten paces, when he will come to the right-about, and command:

 

Present—ARMS;

 

when arms will be presented, officers saluting.

Seeing this executed, he will face about to the com­manding officer, salute, and report, “Sir, the parade is formed.” The adjutant will then, on intimation to that effect, take his station three paces on the left of the commanding officer, one pace retired, passing round his rear.

The commanding officer, having acknowledged the salute of the line by touching his hat, will, after the adju­tant has taken his post, draw his sword, and command:

1. Battalion. 2. Shoulder.—ARMS;

and add such exercises as he may think proper, concluding with:

Order—ARMS;

 

 

 

               THE REGIMENT.                                                        43

 

 

then return his sword, and direct the adjutant to receive the reports. The adjutant will now pass round the right of the commanding officer, advance upon the line, halt midway between him and the line of company officers, and command

First Scrgeants, to the front and centre. 2. MARCH.

 

At the first command, they will shoulder arms as ser­geants, march two paces to the front, and face inward. At the second command, they will march to the centre, and halt. The adjutant will then’ order

 

1. Front—FACE. 2. Report.

 

At the last word, each in succession, beginning on the right, will salute by bringing the left hand smartly across the breast to the right shoulder, and report the result of the roll-call previously made on the company parade. The adju- taut again commands

 

1.   First Sergeants, outward—FACE. 2. To your posts—

MARCH;

when they will resume their places, and order arms. The adjutant will now face to the commanding officer, salute, report absent officers, and give the result of the first ser­geants’ reports. The commanding officer will next direct the orders to be read, when the adjutant will face about, and announce:

 

Attention to Orders.

 

He will then read the orders.

The orders having been read, the adjutant will face to the commanding officer, salute and report; when, on an intimation from the Commander he will face to theline, and announce

 

Parade is Dismissed.

 

 

 

44                                                         THE REGIMENT.

 

 

All the officers will now return their swords, face in- wards, and close on the adjutant, he having taken position in their line, the field officers on the flanks. The adjutant commands:

1. Front—FACE. 2. Forward—MARCH:

 

when they will march forward, dressing on the centre, the music playing, and when within six paces of the com­mander, the adjutant will give the word:

 

HALT.

 

The officers will then salute the commanding officer by raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he shall have communicated to them such instructions as he may have to give, or intimates that the ceremony is fin­ished. As the officers disperse, the first sergeants will close the ranks of their respective companies, and march them to the company parades, where they will be dis­missed, the band continuing to play until the companies clear the regimental parade.

All field, and company officers and men will be pres­ent at dress parades, unless especially excused, or on some duty incompatible with such attendance.

A dress parade once a day will not be dispensed with, except on extraordinary and urgent occasions.

 

 

THE BATTALION IN COLUMN.

 

For the march, in many of the maneuvres, etc., the battalion is in column. The column may be one of com­panies or of divisions, in rare instances it is one of pla­toons. It may be a column right in front, inwhich case the first company, or division, is in front, all the others being behind it in regular  succession; or it may be a

 

 

               THE REGIMENT.                                                          45

 

column left in front, in which the 1ast company or di­vision leads, the others following in the inverse order of their, numbers.

When the right is in front, the guides of the column are habitually to the left, and to the right when the col­umn is left in front.

The column may be one at full distance, at half dis­tance, or closed in mass; in the first ease, the distance between the guides of any two consecutive companies or divisions; in the second case, it is one-half the width of the company or division; and in the last case, that of the column closed in mass, the distance between the guides is six paces.

 

 

POSTS OF THE OFFICERS WHEN THE BATTALION IS IN COLUMN.

 

The colonel is on the directing flank, fifteen or twenty paces from the guides, and abreast the centre of his bat­talion; the lieutenant-colonel is on the directing flank, abreast with the leading company or division, and six paces from the guide; the majors are on the same flank, the senior abreast with the rearmost company or division, and six paces from the guide, the junior in a correspond­ing position abreast the centre company; the adjutant is near the lieutenant-colonel, and the sergeant-major near the senior major.

In a column of companies, the captains are two paces in front of the centres of their companies; the right guide of each company is on the right of the front rank, the left guide in a corresponding position on the left; the lieuten­ants, and remaining sergeants, are in the rank of file-closers.

In a column of divisions, the senior captain of each division is two paces in front of the centre of his division, the junior captain in the interval between the two com-

 

 

 

 

40                                                          THE REGIMENT.

 

 

panies; the right guide of the right company is on the right of the front rank of the division, the left guide of the left company is in a corresponding position on the left; the right guide of the left company is in the rear rank, behind the junior captain, and the left guide of the right company is in the rank of the file-closers.

Two or more regiments serving together constitute a brigade, under the command of a brigadier-general.

Two or more brigades serving together constitute a division, commanded by a major-general.

Two divisions serving together constitute an army corps.

The army corps, when supplied with a due proportion of cavalry, artillery, etc., comprises within itself all the elements of a complete army, ready for any emergency.

The interval between two contiguous regiments in the same brigade, division, or army corps, is twenty-two paces.

As often as one or more brigades or divisions, united in the same line, maneuvre together, each battalion will be designated by its number, according to its position in the line. The battalion on the right of the whole is de­nominated first, that next on its left second, the following one third, and so on to the battalion that closes the left of the line.

In line of battle, the general (the senior major-general present) has no fixed position; he goes whithersoever he may judge his presence necessary.

In column, he will hold himself habitually at its head, in order to direct it according to his views. In the evo­lutions, he will place himself at the point whence he can best direct the general execution of the movement.

In me of battle, generals of division place themselves at about seventy paces in rear of the centres of their di­visions.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

               THE REGIMENT.                                                          41

 

 

In column, they hold themselves on the directing flank, abreast with the centres of their divisions; and at thirty or forty paces from the guides.

In line of battle, generals of brigade place themselves at about forty paces in rear of the centre of their brigades.

In column, they hold themselves at fifteen or twenty paces outside the guides, and abreast with the centre of their brigades.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER V.

 

 

 

THE MARCH.

 

THE army corps drilled and organized on the princi­ples thus far laid down, is in the condition for active ser­vice, beginning with the march.

A badly conducted march is more injurious to the health and morale of troops, than any other error that can be committed in the progress of a campaign. If a table of medical statistics could be formed from the history of various military campaigns, in which the casualties incident to a march were divided from those actually oc­curring in engagements, it would be found that a large proportion were due to causes which might have been easily prevented by the judicious management of the troops on a march. Military commanders have given to this subject too little reflection. There is no doubt that the efficiency of French troops displayed throughout every campaign, which illuminates the history of that na­tion of soldiers, has been due in a great measure to their capacity for maintaining a good physical condition. It is wisdom, therefore, to profit by their example.

The commander of an expedition or of troops on a march, should ascertain previous to moving his force,

1st. The exact quantity and quality of the provisions in the hands of the commissary.

 

 

 

 

 

 

          THE MARCH.                                                             49

 

2d. The exact character and means of transportation.

3d. The exact quality and quantity of reserved cloth­ing.

4th. The amount of reserved ammunition of all kinds.

5th. The character of the transportation for the sick, with the quantity of hospital stores and medicines.

Should any of these be deficient, he should at once take means to provide for the deficiency in some way—at the expense of a positive delay if necessary; recklessness in this respect is inexcusable, and a good commander will hover be guilty of it.

Besides the responsibility of the commanding officer in this respect, a great deal depends upon the officers in immediate command of regiments and companies. The personal habits of the men should be carefully studied, in order that carelessness or recklessness in regard to diet, clothing, or unnecessary exposure to the climate should be checked at once.

All of the preliminary arrangements for the march having been carefully made, the “order of march” is communicated to the several commanding officers of di­visions, brigades and regiments; but should not be published in orders. The troops are distributed according to the character of the country. In a very open country, a large proportion of the cavalry would be at the head of the column; but generally it is distributed throughout the line. The artillery should be in rear of the first foot regiment. An advance and rear guard of mounted troops; one or two companies should be detailed each day, and the regiment that has the right of the line one day, should be the next day in the rear.

If the nature of the country will admit of it, more es­pecially in passing defiles or mountain gorges, a few de­tachments of flankers should be thrown out on the right

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

50                                                             THE MARCH.

 

and left of the column at the distance of one or two hundred paces, to prevent ambuscades and to keep a sharp lookout, to give timely notice of’ any signs of the enemy.

The column having been formed at half or quarter distance, and the baggage train assembled in the rear, properly protected by a baggage guard selected from each regiment for its own baggage; the column is put in mo­tion, and the march commences with precisely the same regularity as would be observed by a regiment or regi­ments moving in or out of a garrison town; the bands playing, the light-infantry with arms sloped, and those of the riflemen slung over the shoulder, the officers with swords drawn, and exact wheeling distances of the sec­tions preserved, and perfect silence observed.

After having proceeded a short distance in this man­ner, the word of command, “route step,” is given by the general at the head of the leading battalion, and this is passed quickly on to the rear from company to company. The captains, instead of continuing at the head of their companies, drop back to the rear of them: the reasons for allotting this station to them is, that they may see any men of their respective companies who attempt to leave the ranks without leave. The officers and non-commis­sioned officers preserve the wheeling distance. The sol­diers now carry their arms in any manner most conven­ient. Some sling them over their shoulder, (most of them, indeed, prefer this mode as the least fatiguing,) others slope them, and many trail them, and they con­stantly change from the right hand or right shoulder to the left. Although allowed to prosecute the march in this easy and unrestrained manner, a heavy penalty, nevertheless, awaits the man who quits the ranks without permission from the captain or officer commanding his company. The captains are always provided with tickets

 

 

 

 

 

 

THE MARCH.                                                              51

 

bearing their own signature; on each is written, “The bearer has my permission to fallout of’ the ranks, being unable to proceed with the regiment.” Any soldier found on the line of march by the rearguard, without a ticket, is liable to be punished for disobedience of orders; and as no difficulty is ever experienced by men who are sick, or used up, in procuring this certificate of inability to keep up with their regiments, such offenders certainly merit punishment.

If a soldier wants to fall out of the ranks for a few minutes only, he is required to ask leave of the captain to do so, and, moreover, to take off his knapsack, and to give it, together with his musket, in charge of the men of’ his own section, to be earned by them until he rejoins them. This is an admirable order, and it operates in two ways: first, the soldier is enabled, not being encumbered with either knapsack or musket, more speedily to over­take the column on its march; and secondly, if he loiters unnecessarily on the way to rejoin his comrades, who are doubly armed with his arms and pack, ho will be certain to incur their displeasure.

About once in every hour and a quarter or half, a halt is ordered, and ten or twelve minutes allowed for the men to rest. When practicable, this is done on ground near, which there is water; but it is almost unnecessary to add, that very frequently it is not possible to find such favorable spots.

Preparatory to these temporary halts, the word of command, Attention ! is given at the head of the lead­ing regiment, and passes on rapidly (as already stated) from company to company. Upon this, the captains move quickly from the rear of their companies to the front; the arms of the soldiers are regularly shouldered or slung; perfect silence is observed ; the dressing and

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

52                                                                THE MARCH.

 

 

the wheeling distances of the sections are correctly kept; and in an instant there is a magical change from apparent irregularity to most perfect discipline and order.

On resuming the march after these halts, the troops observe the same extreme regularity during the first hun­dred or two of yards. The words “route step” being again given, they may carry their arms in any manner.

On approaching rivulets or shallow pieces of water, which it is necessary should be passed, neither officers nor soldiers are allowed to pick their way through, nor is the smallest break or irregularity permitted to exist in the ranks; but the column marches through by half-sections, sections, or subdivisions, (according to the width of the ford,) preserving the same order as if moving along a road.

That this regulation is, on some occasions, too rigidly enforced, has never been disputed; still, the object at which it aims, viz., that of expending as little time as possible on each day’s march, so as to give the soldiers time to take their rest, pitch their tents or construct huts in the bivouac, to draw their rations, and to cook their meals, that they may be fresh for whatever fatigues hap­pen to be in store for them, is indisputably a most de­sirable one.

Those who have campaigned know, that iii advancing to attack an enemy, or in retiring before one, the passage of rivers in the line of march, even if so deep as to reach their middles, and under the fire of an enemy also, axe expected to be crossed by the troops without a greater derangement taking place in their order of march than time obstacles which they are in the act of encountering, must necessarily produce in a greater or less degree.

With a detachment consisting of a few hundred men, at a distance from an enemy, and with ample time before

 

 

 

 

 

 

          THE MARCH.                                                              53

 

them to get over their day’s march, it will appear that this order may well be dispensed with; but with a division of four or five thousand men, the case is widely dif­ferent.

Let it be supposed that it has arrived at a stream which admits of being passed by sections, subdivisions, or even by companies; and that, instead of proceeding straight through it hi this manner, every soldier is per­mitted to pick his way across in any manner he may think proper, and to break off from his place in the ranks, what a vast loss of time this will occasion! When would the rear of the column have effected its passag’? Surely the patience of those belonging to the front, centre, and rear of this body of four thousand soldiers, will be pretty well exhausted long before the opposite bank is gained by the whole, and the march resumed.

In rugged and mountainous districts which armies so frequently traverse, they encounter various defiles and other obstacles, which preclude the possibility of their being passed except by a very small number of men at a time; and the following mode is therefore adopted by each company in making its way along: The first com­pany of the leading battalion, as soon as it has disentan­gled itself from the defile, or broken ground, is directed to march forward, perhaps about a quarter of ii mile; there to stack arms, and the men to rest. The head of the next company, when has cleared the defile, halts about thirty or forty yards on the other side, until all the men belonging to it come up in succession. This done, the captain moves it forward independently until It joins the leading company, where it stacks arms. Thus each company, as soon as it has cleared the obstacles, is brought up en masse, and at a regular pace, without reference to those in its rear. By these means, that most unmilitary

 

 

 

 

 

 

64                                                               THE MARCH.

 

exhibition of file after file running on, like a string of wild geese, to catch those in their front, is entirely avoided.

Few things tend so effectually to fatigue and irritate soldiers who are already jaded, as that of trotting on, bending under the weight of knapsack, belts, and musket, to overtake those who continue to march on in their front.

When the division is about to perform a march not in the immediate vicinity of an enemy, the following ar­rangements are made either for bivouacking or quarter­ing it, (as the case may be,) so that no time shall be lost after it has reached its destination:

A staff-officer, accompanied by the quartermaster of the division, or (if other duties at that moment are re­quired to be performed by the quartermaster) by a sub­altern of each regiment, precede the troops on horseback, so as to arrive long before them at the ground on which they are to halt for the day, or at the town or village in which it is intended they shall be quartered.

A whole street, or part of one, (as circumstances ad­mit,) is allotted by the staff-officer to the quartermasters for each of their regiments, who immediately divide the street into equal portions for the, different companies, re­serving a house or two for the staff of the regiment.

A sergeant of every company of the division being sent forward so as to arrive long before the troops, and being told by his quartermaster how many and what buildings are set apart for his own company, again sub­divides the houses into four equal parts for each of the sections.

In the event of any noise or disturbance taking place, whether by day or by night, the probabilities are, that the officers belonging to the companies where such irregu­larities are going on, will certainly hear it, and as instan­taneously put an end to it.

 

 

 

 

 

 

          THE MARCH.                                                           55

 

If, then, the division marches into a town, each com­pany is by its sergeant conducted to the houses allotted to it; in which they are established in a very few min­utes. It rarely happens, therefore, that the soldiers are kept waiting in the streets for any length of time, as has too often been the case.

Should it, on the other hand, be intended to encamp the division, instead of putting it into houses, arrange­ments of a similar nature are adopted, by sending forward officers and sergeants to take up the ground; by which means each company marches at once up to its own ser­geant, on whom they form in open column.

The rolls are immediately called; the men first for duty are warned for guards, (also inlying and outlying pickets, if near the enemy,) for fatigue duties to draw the rations, to procure wood for cooking if none is near at hand, to go for water if no river flows near the encamp­ment, etc., etc.

This done, and the alarm-post, or place of general as­sembly, having been pointed out to every one, the men are dismissed; the arms stacked, the cooking immediately commences, and all further parades are dispensed with for the day, except a roll-call about sunset.

Parties to procure forage, whether green or dry, are sent out in charge of an officer as soon as the troops are dismissed.

Amongst the various regulations laid down for the light-division, what are termed mule-guards must not be omitted.

A corporal and three privates of every company, mount guard at nightfall, whenever the division is en­camped. The particular duty expected from the sentinels of these company guards, is to keep an eye to the baggage animals belonging to their officers, (which are picketed

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

56                                                                 THE MARCH

 

to the trees or fastened in some manner,) and to prevent them from breaking loose.

After the establishment of these little guards, but few instances will occur of whole troops of noisy mules, horses, and asses, chasing each other round and through the camp or bivouac, and galloping over the faces and bodies of the soldiers whilst they are asleep.

Independent of their utility in this way, every company in the division, having its own sentinel, is sure to be instantly apprised of any alarm during the night from the pickets in front; and they are enabled, also, to com­municate to their respective companies, without the least delay, any orders arriving at the camp.

Those only who have witnessed it, can thoroughly understand with what uncommon facility and despatch the division can suddenly get under arms, form in column of march, load the baggage, and proceed on the route marked out for it.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER VI.

 

THE CAMP.

 

CAMP is the place where the troops are established in tents, in huts, or in bivouac. Cantonments are the in­habited places which troops occupy for shelter when not put in barracks. The camping party is a detachment de­tailed to prepare a camp.

Reconnoissances should precede the establishment of the camp. For a camp of troops on the march, it is only necessary to look to the health and comfort of the troops, the facility of the communications, the convenience of wood and water, and the resources in provisions and forage. The ground for an intrenched camp, or a camp to cover a country, or one designed to deceive the enemy as to the strength of the army, must be selected, and the camp arranged for the object in view.

The camping-party of a regiment consists of the regi­mental quartermaster and quartermaster-sergeant, and a corporal and two men per company. The general decides whether the regiments camp separately or together, and whether the police guard shall accompany the camping party, or a larger escort shall be sent.

The ground selected for an encampment either on the march or for a more permanent camp, should be such as will enable, as near as possible, the following order to be

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

58                                                                 THE CAMP.

 

 

carried out. Of course circumstances will compel a vari­ation from it at times:

 

CAMP OF INFANTRY.

 

 

Each company has its tents in two files, facing on a street perpendicular to the color line. The width of the street depends on the front of the camp, but should not be less than five paces.  The interval between the ranks of tents is two paces; between the files of tents of adja­cent companies, two paces; between regiments, twenty-two paces.

The color line is ten paces in front of the front rank of tents. The kitchens are twenty paces behind the rear rank of company tents; the non-commissioned staff and sutler, twenty paces in rear of the kitchens; the company officers, twenty paces farther in rear; and the field and staff, twenty paces in rear of the company officers.

The company officers are in rear of their respective companies; the captains on the right.

The colonel and lieutenant-colonel are near the centre of the line of field and staff; the adjutant, a major and Burgeon, on the right ; the quartermaster, a major and assistant-surgeon, on the left

The police guard is at the centre of the line of the non-commissioned staff the tents facing to tile front, the stacks of arms on the left.

The advanced post of the police guard is about two hundred paces in front of the color line, and opposite the centre of the regiment, or on the best ground; the pris­oners’ tent about four paces in rear. In a regiment of the second line, the advanced post of the police guard is two hundred paces in rear of the line of its field and staff.

 

· The pace is thirty inches, or two-and-a-halt feet.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

               THE CAMP.                                                            59

 

 

The horses of the staff officers and of the baggage train are twenty-five paces in rear of the tents of’ the field and staff; the wagons are packed on the same line, and the men of the train camped near them.

The sinks of the men are one hundred and fifty paces in front of’ the color line; those of the officers one hun­dred paces in rear of the train. Both are concealed by bushes. When convenient, the sinks of the men may be placed in rear or on a flank. A portion of the earth dug out for sinks to be thrown back occasionally.

The front of the camp of a regiment of’ one thousand men in two ranks will be four hundred paces, or one-fifth less paces than the number of files, if’ the camp is to have the same front as the troops in order of battle. But the front may be reduced to one hundred and ninety paces by narrowing the company streets to five paces; and if it be desirable to reduce the front still more, the tents of companies may be pitched in single file, those of a division facing on the same street.

 

 

CAMPOF CAVALRY.

 

In the cavalry, each company has one file of tents; the tents opening on the street facing the left of’ the camp.

The horses of each company are placed in a single file, facing the opening of the tents, and are fastened to pickets planted firmly in the ground, from three to six paces from the tents of the troops.

The interval between the file of tents should be such, that the regiment being broken into column of companies, each company should be on the column extension of the line on which the horses are to be picketed.

The streets separating the squadrons are wider than those between the companies by the interval separating

 

 

 

 

60                                                             THE CAMP.

 

squadrons in line; these intervals are kept free from any obstruction throughout the camp.

The horses of the rear rank are placed on the left of those of their file-leaders.

The horses of the lieutenants are placed on the right of their platoons; those of the captains on the right of the company.

Each horse occupies a space of about two paces. The number of horses in the company fixes the depth of the camp, and the distance between the files of tents; the forage is placed between the tents.

The kitchens are twenty paces in front of each file of tents.

The non-commissioned officers are in the tents of the front rank. Camp followers, teamsters, etc., are in the rear rank. The police guard in the rear rank, near the centre of the regiment.

The tents of the lieutenants are thirty paces in rear of the file of their company; the tents of the captains thirty paces in rear of the lieutenants.

The colonel’s tent thirty paces in rear of the captain’s, near the centre of the regiment; the lieutenant-colonel on his right; the adjutant on his left; the majors oti the same line, opposite the second company on the right and left; the surgeon on the left of the adjutant.*

The field and staff have their horses on the left of their tents, on the same line with the company horses; sick horses are placed in one line on the right or left of the camp. The men who attend them have a separate file of tents; the forges and wagons in rear of this file. The horses of the train and of camp followers are in one

 

* When there is but one major to a regiment, the post of the colonel will be In the centre of the regiment, on the line of the field and staff; and that of the lieutenant-colonel In the right wing, in place of the senior major.

 

 

 

                       

THE CAMP.                                                              61

 

or more files extending to the rear, behind the right or left squadron. The advanced post of the police guard is two hundred paces in front, opposite the centre of the regiment; the horses in one or two files.

The sinks for the men are one hundred and fifty paces in front, those for officers one hundred paces in rear of the camp.

 

 

CAMP OF ARTILLERY.

 

 

The artillery is encamped near the troops to which it is attached, so as to be protected from attack, and to contribute to the defence of the camp. Sentinels for the park are furnished by the artillery, and, when necessary, by the other troops.

For a battery of six pieces the tents are in three files: one for each section; distance between the ranks of tents fifteen paces; tents opening to the front. The horses of each section are picketed in one file, ten paces to the left of the file of tents. In the horse artillery, or if the num­ber of horses make it necessary, the horses are in two files on the right and left of the file of tents. The kitchens are twenty-five paces in front of the front rank of tents. The tents of the officers are in the outside files of com­pany tents, twenty-five paces in rear of the rear rank; the captain on the right, the lieutenant on the left.

The park is opposite the centre of the camp, forty paces in rear of the officers’ tents.

 

 

DUTIES IN CAMP AND GARRISON.

 

The duties in camp and garrison are to be conducted, as far as practicable, in the same manner and on the same principles.

 

 

 

62                                                            THE CAMP.

 

 

The Reveille is the signal for the men to rise, and the sentinel to leave off challenging.

The Troop is to sound or beat at o’clock in the morning, for the purpose of assembling the men for duty and inspection at guard mounting.

The Retreat is to sound or beat at sunset, for the pur­pose of warning the officers and men for duty, and for reading the orders of the day.

The Tattoo is to be beat at o’clock in the evening, after which no soldier is to be out of his tent or quarters, unless by special leave.

Peas-upon-a-trencher, the signal for breakfast, is to sound or beat at o’clock in the morning.

Boast-beef, the signal for dinner, is to sound or beat at o’clock; at other times it is the signal to draw pro­visions.

The Surgeon’s call is to sound or beat at o’clock, when the sick, able to go out, will be conducted to the hospital by the first sergeants of companies, who will hand to the surgeon a report of all the sick in the com­pany other than in hospital. The patients who cannot attend at the dispensary will be immediately after, if not before, visited by the surgeon.

The General is to beat, only when the whole army is to march, and is the signal to strike the tents and prepare for the march.

The Assembly is the signal to form by company.

To the color is the signal to form by battalion.

The March is for the whole to move.

The Long roll is the signal for getting under arms, in case of alarm or the sudden approach of the enemy.

The Parley is to desire a conference with the enemy.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

          THE CAMP.                                                            63

 

 

 

ROLL CALLS.

 

There should be daily, at least three stated roll calls; viz., at reveille, retreat, and tattoo. They will be made on the company parades by the first sergeants, superintended by a commissioned officer of the company. The captains should report the absentees, without leave, to the colonel or commanding officer.

Immediately after reveille roll call, (after stable duty in the cavalry,) the tents or quarters, and the space around them, will be put in order by the men of the companies, superintended by the chiefs of squads, and the guard house or guard tent by the guard or prisoners.

The morning reports of companies, signed by the cap­tains and first sergeants, will be handed to the adjutant before eight o’clock in the morning, and will be consoli­dated by the adjutant within the next hour, for the infor­mation of the colonel; and if the consolidation is to be sent to higher authority, it will be signed by the colonel and the adjutant.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER VIL

 

GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.

 

On a march continued from day to day the ceremony of guard-mounting is dispensed with; the men being notified the night before for the next day’s guard; and the guards are formed immediately after the army is in camp. On all other occasions the following forms are ob­served:

At the first call for guard-mounting, the men warned for duty turn out on their company parades for inspection by the first sergeants; and, at the second call, re­pair to the regimental or garrison parade, conducted by the first sergeants. Each detachment, as it arrives, will, under the direction of the adjutant, take post on the left of the one that preceded it, in open order, arms shouldered and bayonets fixed; the supernumeraries five paces in the rear of the men of their respective companies; the first sergeants in rear of them. The sergeant-major will dress the ranks, count the files, verify the details, and when the guard is formed, report to the adjutant, and take two paces on the left of the front rank.

The adjutant then commands Front; when the officer of the guard takes post twelve paces in front of the cen­tre; the sergeants, in one rank, four paces in the rear of

 

               

GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.                                           66

 

the officers; and the corporals, in one rank, four paces in the rear of the sergeants, all facing to the front. The adjutant then assigns their places in the guard.

The adjutant will then command,

1.   Officers and non-commissioned        2. About—FACE.   

        officers.                 3. Inspect your guards—MARCH.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          

 

The non-commissioned officers then take their posts. The commander of the guard then commands:

 

I.    Order—ARMS. 2. Inspection of ARMS;

 

and inspects his guard. When there is no commissioned officer on the guard, the adjutant will inspect it. During inspection the band will play.

The inspection ended, the officer of the guard takes post as though the guard were a company of a battalion, in open order, under review; at the same time, also, the officers of the day will take post in front of the centre of the guard; the old officer of the day three paces on the right of the new officer of the day, one pace retired.

The adjutant will then command,

      1.       Parade—REST.     2. Troop—Beat Off;

 

when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down the line in front of the officer of the guard to the left, and back to its place on the right, where it will cease to play.

The adjutant then commands,

 

l. Attention. 2. Shoulder—ARMS. 3. Close order—MARCH.At the word “Close order,” the officer will face about; at “March,” resume his post in line. The adjutant then commands:

Present—ARMS;

 

at which he will face to the new officer of the day, salute, and report, “Sir, the guard is formed.” The new officer

 

 

66                                                 GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.

 

of the day; after acknowledging the salute, will direct the adjutant to march the guard in review, or by flank, to its post. But if the adjutant be senior to the officer of the day, he will report without saluting with the sword then, or when marching the guard in review.

In review the guard march past the officer of the day, according to the order of review, conducted by the ad­jutant, marching on the left of the first division; the sergeant-major on the left of the last division.

When the column has passed the officer of the day, the officer of the guard marches it to its post, the adjutant and sergeant-major retiring. The music, which has wheeled out of the column, and taken post opposite to the officer of the day, will cease, and the old officer of the day salute, and give the old or standing orders to the new officer of the day. The supernumeraries, at the same time, will be marched by the first sergeants to their re­spective company parades, and dismissed.

In bad weather or at night, or after fatiguing marches, the ceremony of turning off may be dispensed with, but not the inspection.

Grand guards and other brigade guards are organized and mounted on the brigade parade by the staff officers of the parade, under the direction of the field officer of the day of the brigade, according to the principles here prescribed for the police guard of a, regiment. The de­tail of each regiment is assembled on the regimental pa­rade, verified by the adjutant, and marched to the brigade parade by the senior officer of the detail. After inspec­tion and review, the officer of the day directs the several guards to their respective posts.

The officer of the old guard, having his guard paraded, on the approach of the new guard, commands

Present—ARMS.

 

 

 

 

 

          GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.                                          67

 

 

The new guard will march, in quick time, past the old guard, at shouldered arms, officers saluting, and take post four paces on its right, where, being alligned with it, its commander will order:

Present—ARMS.

 

The two officers will then approach each other and salute. They will then return to their respective guards, and command:

      1. Shoulder—ARMS.       2. Order—ARMS.

 

The officer of the new guard will now direct the de­tail for the advanced guard to be formed and marched to its post, the list of the guard made and divided into three reliefs, experienced soldier~ placed over the arms of the guard and at the remote and responsible posts, and the young soldiers in posts near the guard for instruction in their duties, and will himself proceed to take possession of the guard-house or guard-tent, and the articles and prisoners in charge of the guard.

During the time of relieving the sentinels and of call­ing in the small posts, the old commander will give to the new all the information and instruction relating to his post.

The first relief having been designated and ordered two paces to the front, the corporal of the new guard will take charge of it, and go to relieve the sentinels, accom­panied by the corporal of the old guard, who will take command of the old sentinels, when the whole are relieved.

If the sentinels are numerous, the sergeants are to be employed, as well as the corporals, in relieving them.

The relief with arms at a support, in two ranks, will march by a flank, conducted by the corporal on the side of the leading front-rank man; and the men will he num­bered alternately in the front and rear rank, the man on

 

 

 

 

68                                                  GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.

 

 

the right of the front rank being No. 1. Should an officer approach, the corporal will command Carry arms, and resume the support arms when the officer is passed.

The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will be the first relieved and left behind; the others are relieved in succession.

 

When the sentinel sees the relief approaching, he will halt and face to it, with his arms at a shoulder. At six paces, the corporal will command:

 

I. Relief. 2. HALT;

 

when the relief will halt and carry arms. The corporal will then add, No. I,” or No. 2,” or No 3,” accord­ing to the number of the post:

 

Arms—PORT.

 

The two sentinels will, with arms at port, then ap­proach each other, when the old sentinel, under the di­rection of the corporal, will whisper the instructions to the new sentinel. This done, the two sentinels will shoul­der arms, and the old sentinel will pass, in quick time, to his place in rear of the relief. The corporal will then command:

 

1.   Support—ARMS. 2. Forward. 3. MARCH

 

and the relief proceeds in the same manner until the whole are relieved.

The detachments and sentinels from the old guard having come in, it will be marched, at shouldered arms, along the front of the new guard, in quick time, the new guard standing at presented arms; officers saluting, and the music of both guards beating, except at the outposts.

On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade, the commander of the old guard will send the detachments composing it, under charge of the non-commissioned

 

 

 

GUARDS AND GUARD-M0UNTING.                                        69

 

officers, to their respective regiments. Before the men are dismissed, their pieces will be drawn or discharged at a target. On rejoining their companions, the chiefs of squads will examine the arms, etc., of their men, and cause the whole to be put away in good order.

When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the officer of the new guard will order his men to stack their arms, or place them in the arm-racks.

The commander of the guard will then make himself acquainted with all the instructions for his post, visit the sentinels, and question them and the non-commissioned officers relative to the instructions they may have received from other persons of the old guard.

Sentinels will be relieved every two hours, unless the state of the weather or other causes should make it neces- sary or proper that it be done at shorter or longer in­tervals.

Each relief, before mounting, is inspected by the com­mander of the guard or of its post. The corporal reports to him, and presents the old relief on its return.

The countersign or watchword is given to such persons as are entitled to pass during the night, and to officers, non-commissioned officers, and sentinels of the guard. Interior guards receive the countersign only when ordered by the commander of the troops.

The parole is imparted to such officers only as have a right to visit the guards and to make the grand rounds, and to officers commanding guards.

As soon as the new guard has been marched off the officer of the day will repair to the office of the command­ing officer and report for orders.

The officer of the day must see that the officer of the guard is furnished with the parole and countersign before retreat.

 

 

 

 

 

 

70                                                 GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.

 

The officer of the day visits the guards during the day at such times as he may deem necessary, and makes his rounds at night, at least once after twelve o’clock.

Upon being relieved, the officer of the day will make such remarks in the report of the officer of the guard as circumstances require, and present the same at head­quarters.

Commanders of guards leaving their posts to visit their sentinels, or on other duty, are to mention their in­tention and the probable time of their absence, to the next in command.

The officers are to remain constantly at their guards, except while visiting their sentinels, or necessarily engaged elsewhere on their proper duty.

Neither officers nor soldiers are to take off their cloth­ing or accoutrements while they are on guard.

The officer of the guard must see that the countersign is duly communicated to the sentinels a little before twi­light.

When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a. garrison, all guards are to be immediately under arms.

Inexperienced officers are put on guard. as supernu­meraries, for the purpose of instruction.

Sentinels will not take orders or allow themselves to be relieved, except by an officer or non-commissioned officer of their guard or party, the officer of the day or the commanding officer; in which case the orders will be immediately communicated to the commander of the guard by the officer giving them.

Sentinels will report every breach of orders or regula­tions they are instructed to enforce.

Sentinels must keep themselves on the alert, observing every thing that takes place within sight and hearing of their post. They will carry their arms habitually at sup-

 

 

 

 

 

 

GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.                                          71

 

 

port, or on either shoulder, but will never quit them. In wet weather, if there be no sentry-box, they will secure arms.

No sentinel shall quit his post, or hold conversation not necessary to the discharge of his duty.

All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are re­quired to observe respect toward sentinels.

In case of disorder, a sentinel must call out, The Guard! and if a fire takes place, he must cry “Fire!” adding the number of his post. If, in either ease, the danger be great, he must discharge his piece before calling out.

It is the duty of a sentinel to repeat all calls made from posts more distant from the main body of the guard than his own, and no sentinel will be posted so distant as not to be heard by the guard, either directly or through other sentinels.

Sentinels will present arms to general and field officers, to the officer of the day, and to the commanding officer of the post. To all other officers they will carry arms.

When a sentinel, in his sentry-box, sees an officer ap­proaching, he will stand at attention, and, as the officer passes, will salute him, by bringing the left hand briskly to the musket, as high as the right shoulder.

The sentinel, at any post of the guard, when he sees any body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, approach, must call, ”Turn out the guard!“ and announce who approaches.

Guards do not turn out, as a matter of compliment, after sunset; but sentinels will, when officers in uniform approach, pay them proper attention, by facing to the proper front and standing steady at shouldered arms. This will be observed until the evening is so far advanced that the sentinels begin challenging.

 

 

 

 

 

 

71.                                              GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.

 

After retreat, (orthe hour appointed by the command­ing officer,) until broad daylight, a sentinel challenges every person who approaches him, taking, at the same time, the position of arms port, he will suffer no person to come nearer than within reach of his bayonet; until the person has given the countersign.

A sentinel, in challenging, wiIl call out, Who comes there?” If answered, “Friend, with the countersign,” and he be instructed to pass persons with the countersign, he will reply, Advance, friend, with the countersign.” If answered Friends,” he will reply, Halt, friends! Advance, one, with the countersign.” If answered “Re­lief,” “Patrol,” or “Grand rounds,” he will reply, “Halt! Advance, sergeant (or corporal), with the countersign,”

and satisfy himself that the party is what it represents it­self to be. If he have no authority to pass persons with the countersign, if the wrong countersign be given, or the persons have not the countersign, he will cause them to stand, and call, “corporal of the guard!”

In the daytime, when the sentinel before the guard sees the officer of the day approach, he will call, “Turn out the guard! Officer of the day!” The guard will be paraded, and salute with presented arms.

When any person approaches a post of the guard atnight, the sentinel before the post, after challenging, causes him to halt, until examined by a non-commissioned officer of the guard. If it be the officer of the day, or any other officer entitled to inspect the guard and to make the rounds, the non-commissioned officer will call, “Turn out the guard!” when the guard will be paraded at shoul­dered arms, and the officer of the guard, if he thinks neces­sary, may demand the countersign and parole.

The officer of the day, wishing to make the rounds, will take an escort of a non-commissioned officer and two men.

 

 

 

 

 

               GUARDS AND GUARD-M0UNTING.                                        73

 

 

When the rounds are challenged by a sentinel, the ser­geant will answer, “Grand rounds! and the sentinel will reply, “Halt, grand rounds! Advance, sergeant, with the countersign!” Upon which the sergeant advances and gives the countersign. The sentinel will then cry, “Advance, rounds! and stand at a shoulder till they have passed.

When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and is answered, “Grand rounds,” he will reply, “halt, grand rounds ! Turn out the guard; grand rounds! Upon which the guard will be drawn up at shouldered arms. The officer commanding the guard will then order a sergeant and two men to advance; when within ten paces, the sergeant challenges. The sergeant of the grand rounds answers, “Grand rounds!” The sergeant of the guard replies, “Advance, sergeant, with the countersign! The sergeant of the rounds advances alone, gives the counter­sign, and returns to his round. The sergeant of the guard calls to his officer, “The countersign is right! on which the officer of the guard calls, “Advance, rounds!The officer of the rounds then advances alone, the guard stand­ing at shouldered arms. The officer of the rounds passes along in front of the guard to the officer, who keeps his post on the right, and gives him the parole. He them ex­amines the guard, orders back his escort, and taking a new one, proceeds in the same manner to other guards.

All material instructions given to a sentinel on post, by persons entitled to make grand rounds, ought to be promptly communicated to the commander of the guard.

Any general officer, or the commander of a post or garrison, may visit the guards of his command, and go the grand rounds, and be received in the same manner as prescribed for the officer of the day.

 

 

 

 

 

 

74                                                GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.

 

PICKET GUARD.

 

 

The picket guard is stationed at some advantageous point in advance of the man body for the purpose of watching the enemy, to intercept the passage of couriers or small parties, to give notice of the approach of any considerable force, and to intercept them, if possible, by such a show as will cause sufficient delay to enable the fact to be communicated at head-quarters. The strength of a picket guard depends upon the position they are sent to occupy, and the proximity of the enemy. The point occupied should be susceptible of some defence. The picket should be relieved every day; if not, the fact should be known when the guard is posted.

All out guards stand to arms at night on the approach of’ patrols, rounds, or other parties; the sentinel of the arms will call them out.

The sentinels and videttes are placed on points from which they can see furthest, taking care not to break their connection with each other, or with their post. They are concealed from the enemy as much as possible by walls or trees or elevated ground. It is generally of more ad­vantage not to be seen than to see far. A sentinel should always be ready to fire, and when once satisfied of the presence of an enemy, he should fire, although all defence on his part were useless, since the safety of the post may depend upon it.

 

PRISONERS.

 

 

The prisoners under charge of a guard should not be allowed to hold extended communication with each other or with the men on guard. They should be forced to maintain the utmost decorum, and a disturbance of any

 

 

v

 

 

 

GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.                                                75

 

kind should be checked at once by the application of the most efficient means, On the march the prisoners are placed in charge of the old picket guards with bayonets fixed and arms loaded, They march in the centre of the regiment. On reaching camp, they are turned over to the new guard as soon as posted.

A. B. C,

                              Lieutenant 1st Regiment,

Commanding the Guard,

 

 

 

 

 

76                                         GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER VIII.

 

RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.

 

The history of military campaigns develops no fact more striking, than that a very large percentage of the casualties are those of diseases incident to an improper diet. Especially was this made evident in the Mexican War among the volunteer troops called suddenly from the pursuits of civil life, and from the comforts and con­veniences of home, they were transferred at once to a cli­mate, different in every respect to that in which they had always lived. Exposed to every change of weather, from the intense heat of the plains, to the piercing cold of the mountains; sleeping constantly in the open air; they universally exhibited that want of discretion in regard to their food, the manner of cooking it, and time of eating it which would naturally be expected from men who had never been called upon to give the slightest thought to the subject.

In the case of the regular troops, it was considered a part of the duties of the officers in immediate command to watch the soldiers in this particular, and to prevent them from eating unripe fruit or other improper food, which they procured along the march. This surveillance was found to be the more necessary during the temporary oc­-

 

 

 

 

 

78                                      RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.

 

 

cupation of towns, as it was there so very easy to pro­cure something to eat without the trouble of cooking it. In addition to all this, it was found to be generally the case that the ration was badly cooked at the regular mess, owing to a want of knowledge of the time required for the different articles of food to be properly cooked.

The Crimean War was another example of the same fatal error, and so palpable did it become, that the War Department of Great Britain was induced to send out to the seat of war competent persons to instruct the troops in the manner of cooking their rations. The beneficial effects of this step were at once exhibited in the improved condition of the health of the army.

With a view to obviate a large portion of discomfort and disease in this particular, a number of receipts have been prepared:

1st. For cooking the ration as issued to the troops

2d. For cooking such food, other than the ration, as may be obtained in the field, and

3d. For hospital diets for the use of the sick.

The regular daily ration of food issued to the troops in the United States service, is three-fourths of a pound of pork or bacon, or one and a fourth pounds of fresh or salt beef; eighteen ounces of bread or flour, or twelve ounces of hard bread, or one and a fourth pounds of corn meal, and at the rate, to one hundred rations, of eight quarts of peas or beans, or, iii lieu thereof, ten pounds of rice; six pounds of coffee; twelve pounds of sugar; four quarts of vinegar, one and a half pounds of tallow, or one and a fourth pounds of adamantine, or one pound sperm candles; four pounds of soap, and two quarts of salt.

On a campaign, or on marches, or on board transports, the ration of hard bread is one pound.

Fresh beef, when it can be procured, should be fur-

 

 

 

 

               RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.                                     79

 

 

nished at least twice a week; the beef to he procured, if possible, by contract.

 

RECEIPTS.

 

 

1st.—Soldiers’ Soup for 25 men.

 

15 quarts of water to 25pounds of meat, 2 small ta­ble-spoonsful of salt, half a one of pepper. About 2 pounds of rice put in while boiling, and what vegetables fresh or preserved that can be procured—say 3 pounds.

 

2d.—Pork Soup for 25 men.

 

In 6 gallons of                                                  cold water put 12 pounds of pork, 3 quarts of beans, 2 pounds of rice, season to suit; let boil one hour and a half.  Soak the beans over night.

 

3d.—Irish Stew for 25 men.

 

25 pounds of mutton, veal, beef or pork, cut into pieces six inches square, 4 pounds of onions, 8 pounds po­tatoes, 4 table-spoonsful of salt, 1 of pepper; add 8 quarts of water. Cook it from one to two hours slowly, thicken the gravy with flour mixed into a smooth paste with water or potatoes, mashed fine.

 

4th.— Tea for 25 men.

 

Allow 12 quarts of water; put the rations of tea—a large teaspoonful to each—in a cloth tied up very loosely, throw it into the boiler while it is boiling hard for a mo­ment. Then take off the boiler, cover it, and let it stand full ten minutes, when it will be ready to use; first add sugar and milk if to be had, at the rate of 3 pints or 2 quarts of milk, and a pound or a pound and a half of sugar.

 ­

 

 

80                                     RATIONS, AND MODE 0F COOKING THEM.

 

 

5th.—Pork with Peas or Beans for 25 mcn.

 

To 14 pounds of pork add 6 pounds of peas or beans, put them in a cloth to boil, tying it very loosely, place them both in the boiler; let them boil about two hours. Then take out the pork, add some flour to the gravy, and put the peas or beans in it with two or three onions cut up fine; let it boil a little longer, mash up the vegetables very finely, and serve them round the dish with the meat.

 

6th.—Plain Stewed Meat for 25 men.

 

Take 14 pounds of mutton, beef, veal or pork, cut it into chunks and put it in the boiler. Add 4 quarts of water, 2 quarts to a teaspoonful of salt, and half a tea­spoonful of pepper, 8 or 10 onions cut in pieces; let it boil half an hour, then let it stew slowly from half an hour to an hour longer, adding 1 pound of rice, potatoes, or any vegetable that can be obtained; thicken the gravy with flour mixed to a smooth paste in cold water.

 

7th.—Stewed Salt Pork or Beef for 25 men.

 

Wash the meat well, let it soak all night, wash out the salt as much as possible; 8 pounds of salt beef, 5pounds of salt pork, 1/3of a pound of sugar, 2 pounds of sliced onions, 0 quarts of water, and a pound of rice; let it simmer gently for two or three hours.

 

8th.—Salt Pork with Potatoes and Cabbage for 25 men.

 

Take 15 pounds of pork, extract the bones, 3 pounds of potatoes, 2 winter cabbages, let it boil for two hours; 10 quarts of water. Serve the meat with vegetables round it. The gravy will make a good broth with peas, beans, or rice added, also a little onion. Ship biscuit broken into the broth makes a very nutritious soup.

 

 

 

 

          RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.                                 81

 

9th.— To Fry any kind of Meat.

 

Get your frying-pan very hot, put in some fat pork which will immediately melt, then put in the meat you wish to fry, (a small teaspoonful of salt and a quarter of a teaspoonful of pepper to every pound of meat.) When done, lay the meat on a dish, add a pint of water to the fatin the frying-pan, a few slices of onions, or 2 teaspoonsful of vinegar; thicken it with a little flour and pour it over the cooked meat. Any sauce, or a fewchopped pickles, may be substituted for the vinegar or onions.

 

1Oth.—Coffee for 25 men.

 

Take 12 quarts of water, when it boils add 20 ounces of coffee, mix it well and leave it on the fire till it com­mences to boil; then take it off; and pour into it a little more than a quart of cold water; let it stand in a warm place full ten minutes ; the dregs will settle at the bottom and the coffee be perfectly clear. Pour it then into an­other vessel, leaving the dregs in the first; add sugar, 4 teaspoonsful to the quart. If you can get milk, leave out five quarts of water in the above receipt, and put milk in its place.     

 

11th—Peas or Bean Soup for 25 men.

 

Take 14 pounds of pork, 8 quarts of peas or beans, 20 quarts of water, 25 teaspoonsful of sugar, 12 of pepper, and several large onions; boil gently till the vegetables are soft, from four to five hours.

 

l2th.—Receipt for a small quantity of mashed Meat.

 

Cut the meat in very small pieces; heat the frying-pan, put into it half a pint of water, half a teaspoonful of salt, and a teaspoonful of flour, and let it cook fifteen min-­

 

 

 

 

 

82                                          RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.

 

 

utes. Salt meat can be cooked the same, omitting the salt; in its place putting a small spoonful of sugar, spices, or pickles, chopped fine, dish it on to some ship biscuit. Steak, chops, sausages, bacon slices of any kind of meat can be cooked in a frying-pan, with a little melted fat at the bottom. Salt meat should always be soaked.

 

 

HOSPITAL DIETS.

 

 

No. 1.—Semi-stewed Mutton and Barley Soup for 100

men.

 

Put in a convenient-sized caldron 130 pints of cold water, 70 pounds of meat, or about that quantity, 12 pounds of plain mixed vegetables, (the best that can be obtained,) 9 pounds 6 ounces of barley, 1 pound 7 ounces of salt, 1 pound 4 ounces of flour, 1 pound 4 ounces of sugar, 1 ounce of pepper. Put all the ingredients into the pan at once, except the flour; set it on the fire, and when beginning to boil, diminish the heat, and simmer gen­tly for two hours and a half; take the joints of meat out, and keep them warm in the orderly’s pan; add to the soup your flour, which you have mixed with enough water to form a light batter; stir well together with a large spoon; boil another half hour, skim off the fat, and serve the soup and meat separate. The meat may he put back into the soup for a few minutes to warm again prior to serving. The soup should be stirred now and then while making, to prevent burning or sticking to the bottom of the caldron.

 

NOTE.—The word “about” is applied to the half and full diet, which varies the weight of the meat; but ½ lb. of mutton will always make a pint of good soup: 3 lbs. of mixed preserved vege­tables must be used when fresh are not to be obtained, and put in one hour and a hail prior to serving, instead of at first; they will then show better in the soup, and still be well done.

 

 

 

               RATIONS AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.                                   83

 

 

The joints are cooked whole, and afterwards cut up in different messes; being cooked this way, in a rather thick stock, the meat becomes more nutritious.

All the following receipts may be increased to large quantities, but by all means closely follow the weight and measure.

 

No. 2.—Beef Soup.

 

Proceed the same as for mutton, only leave the meat in till serving, as it will take longer than mutton. The pieces are not to be above 4 or 5pounds weight, and for a change half rice may be introduced; the addition of 2 pounds more will make it thicker and more nutritive; ¼ pound of curry powder will make an excellent change also. To vary the same, half’ a pint of burnt sugar water may be added; it will give the soup a very rich brown color.

 

No. 3.—.-Beef Tea. Receipt for 6 pints.

 

Cut 3 pounds of beef into pieces the size of walnuts, and chop up the bones, if any; put it into a convenient­ sized kettle, with ½ pound of mixed vegetables, such as onions, leeks, celery, turnips, carrots, (or one or two of these, if all are not to be obtained,) one ounce of salt, a little pepper, 1 teaspoonful of sugar, 2 ounces of butter, half a pint of water. Set it on a sharp fire for ten minutes or a quarter of an hour, stirring now and then with a spoon, till it forms a rather thick gravy at bottom, but not brown; then add 7 pints of hot or cold water, but hot is preferable; when boiling, let it simmer gently for an hour ; skim off all the fat, strain it through a sieve, and serve.

 

 

 

 

 

 

84                                         RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.

 

 

No. 4.—Thick Beef Tea.

 

Dissolve a good teaspoonful of arrowroot in a gill of water, and pour it into the beef tea twenty minutes before passing through the sieve; it is then ready.

 

No. 5. —Strengthening Beef Tea with Calves-foot Jelly or  Isinglass.

 

Add ¼ ounce calves-foot gelatine to the above quantity of beef tea previous to serving, when cooking.

 

No. 6.—Mutton and Veal Tea.

 

Mutton and veal will make good tea by proceeding precisely the same as above. The addition of a little aro­matic herbs is always desirable. If no fresh vegetables are at hand, use 2 ounces of mixed preserved vegetables to any of the above receipts.

 

No. 7.—Chicken Broth.

 

Put in a stew-pan a fowl, 3 pints of water, 2 teaspoonsful of rice, 1 teaspoonful of salt, a middle-sized onion, or 2 ounces of mixed vegetables; boil the whole gently for three-quarters of an hour; if an old fowl, simmer from one hour and a half to two hours, adding one pint more water; skim off the fat, and serve. A small fowl will do.

 

NOTE.—A light mutton broth may be made precisely the same, by using a pound and a half of scrag of mutton instead of fowl.

For thick mutton broth proceed as for thick beef tea, omitting the rice; a table-spoonfuI of burnt sugar water will give a rich color to the broth.

 

 

No. 8.—Plain Boiled Rice.

 

Put 2 quarts of water in a stew-pan, with a teaspoonful of salt; when boiling, add to it ½ pound of rice, well

 

 

 

 

 

 

               RATIONS AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.                                     85

 

 

washed boil for ten minutes, or till each grain becomes rather soft ; drain it into a colander, slightly grease the pot with butter, and put the rice back into it; let it swell slowly for about twenty minutes near the fire, or in a slow oven ; each grain will then swell up, and be well separated; it is then ready for use.

 

No. 9.—Sweet Rice.

 

Add to the plain boiled rice 1 ounce of butter, 2 table­spoonsful of sugar, a little cinnamon, a quarter of a pint of milk ; stir it with a fork, and serve; a little currant­-jelly or jam may be added to the rice.

 

No. 10.—Rice with Gravy.

 

Add to the rice 4 tablespoonsful of the essence of beef, a little butter, if fresh, half a teaspoonful of salt; stir together with a fork, and serve.

 

No. 11 .—Plain Oatmeal.

 

Put in a pan ¼ pound of oatmeal, 1 ½ ounce of sugar, half a teaspoonful of salt, and 3 pints of water; boil slowly for twenty minutes, stirring continually, and serve. A quarter of a pint of boiled milk, an ounce of butter, and a little pounded cinnamon or spice added previous to serving, is a good variation.

This receipt has been found most useful at the com­mencement of dysentery, by medical authorities.

 

No. 12.—Calves-foot Jelly.

 

Put in a proper-sized stew-pan 24- ounces of calves-foot gelatine, 4ounces of white sugar, 4 whites of eggs and shells, the peel of a lemon, the juice of 3 middle-sized lemons, half a pint of Marsala wine; beat all well together

 

 

 

 

 

86                                        RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.

 

with the egg-beater for a few minutes, then add 4 ½ pints of cold water; set it on a slow fire, and keep whipping it till boiling. Set it on the corner of the stove, partly cov­ered with the lid, upon which you place a few pieces of burning charcoal ; let it simmer gently for ten minutes, and strain it through a jelly-bag. It is then ready to put in the ice or some cool place. Sherry will do if Marsala is not at hand.

 

For orange jelly use only 1 lemon and 2 oranges. Any delicate flavor may be introduced.

 

Jelly Stock,

 

made from calves’ feet, requires to he made the day previous to being used, requiring to be very hard to extract the fat. Take two calves’ feet, cut them up, and boil in 3 quarts of water; as soon as it boils remove it to the cor­ner of the fire, and simmer for five hours, keeping it skimmed; pass through a hair-sieve into a basin, and let it re­main until quite hard; then remove the oil and fat, and wipe the top dry. Place in a stew-pan half a quart of water, 1 of sherry, half a pound of lump sugar, the juice of 4 lemons, the rinds of 2, and the whites and shells of 5 eggs; whisk until the sugar is incited, then add the jelly, place it on the fire, and whisk until boiling, pass it through a jelly-bag, pouring that back again which comes through first, until quite clear; it is then ready far use, by putting it in moulds or glasses. Vary the flavor ac­cording to fancy.

 

 

No. 13.—Sage Jelly

 

Put into a pan 3 ounces of sage, 1 ½ ounces of soft sugar, half a lemon peel cut very thin, ¼ teaspoonful of ground cinnamon, or a small stick of the same; put to it

 

 

 

 

                        RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.                                     87

 

 

3 pints of water and a little salt; boil ten minutes, or rather longer, stirring continually until rather thick, then add a little port, sherry, or Marsala wine; mix well, and serve hot or cold.

 

No. 14.—Arrowroot Milk.

 

Put into a pan 4 ounces of arrowroot, 3 ounces of su­gar, the peel of half a lemon, ¼ teaspoonful of salt, 2 ½ pints of’ milk; set it on the fire, stir round gently, boil for ten minutes, and serve. If no lemons are at hand, a little essence of any kind will do.

When short of milk, use half water; half an ounce of fresh butter is an improvement before serving. If required thicker, put a little milk.

 

No. 15.—Thick Arrowroot Panada.

 

Put in a pan 5 ounces of arrowroot, 2 ½ ounces of white sugar, the peel of half a lemon, a quarter of a teaspoonful of salt, 4 pints of water; mix all well, set on the fire, boil for ten minutes; it is then ready. The juice of a lemon is an improvement; a gill of’ wine may also be in­troduced, and ½ ounce of calves-foot gelatine previously dissolved in water will be strengthening. Milk, however, is preferable, if at hand.

 

No. 16.—Arrowroot Water.

 

Put into a pan 3 ounces of arrowroot, 2 ounces of white sugar, the peel of a lemon, ¼ teaspoonful of salt, 4 pints of water; mix well, set on the fire, boil for ten minutes. It is then ready to serve either hot or cold.

 

N0. 17.—Rice Water.

 

Put 7 pints of water to boil, add to it 2 ounces of rice washed, 2 ounces of sugar, the peel of two-thirds of a lem—

 

 

 

 

 

 

88                                           RATIONS,  AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.

 

 

on; boil gently forthree-quarters of an hour; it will re­duce to 5 pints ; strain through a colander it is then ready.

The rice may be left in the beverage or made into a pudding, or by the addition of a little sugar or jam, will be found very good for either children or invalids.

 

No. 18.—Barley Water.

 

Put in a saucepan 7 pints of water, 2 ounces of barley, which stir now and then while boiling; add 2 ounces of white sugar, the rind of half a lemon, thinly peeled; let it boil gently for about two hours, without covering it; pass it through a sieve or colander ; it is then ready. The barley and lemon may be left in.

 

No. 19.—Plain Lemonade.

 

Thinly peel the third part of a lemon, which put into a basin with 2 tablespoonsful of sugar; roll the lemon with your hand upon the table to soften it; cut it into two, lengthwise, squeeze the juice over the peel, &c., stir round for a minute with a spoon to form a sort of syrup; pour over a pint of water, mix well, and remove the pips; it is then ready for use. If a very large lemon, and full of juice, and very fresh, you may make a pint and a half to a quart, adding sugar and peel in proportion to the in­crease of water. The juice only of the lemon and sugar will make lemonade, but will then be deprived of the aroma which the rind contains, the said rind being gen­erally thrown away.

 

No. 20.—Semi-citric Lemonade. Receipt for 50 pints.

 Put 1 ounce of citric acid to dissolve in a pint of wa­ter; peel 20 lemons thinly, and put the peel in a large

 

 

 

 

 

RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.                                    89

 

 

vessel, with 3 pounds 2 ounces of white sugar well broken; roll each lemon on the table to soften it, which will facili­tate the extraction of the juice; cut them into two, and press out the juice into a colander or sieve, over the peel und sugar, then pour half a pint of water through the colander, so as to leave no juice remaining; triturate the sugar, juice, and peel together for a minute or two with a spoon, so as to form a sort of syrup, and extract the aroma from the peel and the dissolved citric acid; mix all well together, pour on 50 pints of cold water, stir well togeth­er; it is then ready. A little ice in summer is a great addition.

 

 

No. 21.—. Cheap Lemonade.

 

Put into a basin 2 table-spoonsful of white or brown sugar, half a table-spoonful of lime juice; mix well togeth­er for one minute, add 1 pint of water, and the beverage is ready. A drop of rum will make a good variation, as lime juice and rum are daily issued to the soldiers.

 

 

No. 22.— Tartaric Lemonade.

 

Dissolve 1 ounce of crystallized tartaric acid in a pint of cold water, which put in a large vessel ; when dis­solved, add 1 pound 9 ounces of white or brown sugar— the former is preferable; mix well to farm a thick syrup; add to it 24 pints of cold water, slowly mixing well; it is then ready.

It may be strained through either a colander or a jelly­-bag; if required very light, add 5pints more water, and sugar in proportion; if citric acid be used, put only 20 pints of water to each ounce.

 

 

 

 

 

9O                                        RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.

 

No. 23.—Toast and Water.

 

Cut a piece of crusty bread, about ¼ pound in weight, place it upon a toasting-fork, and hold it about six inches from the fire; turn it often, and keep moving it gently until of a light yellow color, then place it nearer the fire, and when of a good brown chocolate color, put it in a jug and pour over 3 pints of boiling water; cover the jug until cold, then strain it in a clean jug, and it is ready for use. Never leave the toast in it, for in summer it would cause fermentation in a short time. I would almost venture to say that such toast and water should be made, and that it would keep good a considerable time in bottles.

 

 

THE CAMP STOVE.

 

The arrangements for cooking the rations on a march or in camp, are always more or less annoying to troops. Coming into camp perhaps during a storm after a long day’s march, the men have to wait for their supper until a party has been despatched with a team sometimes several miles to procure fuel, this more frequently green wood than dry. After the fuel arrives and a fire is kin­dled, it takes a long time before the food is cooked. In the meanwhile, wet, weary, and half sick, time men are waiting for their supper. If this could be given to them at once, and they could go to their tents and rest, how much more fitted they would be for duty the next morning, and how much smaller would be the sick report. A great portion of this discomfort would be obviated by the use of a camp stove, a drawing of which is shown in plate . Two of these stoves to a company are sufficient.  All the necessary kettles and utensils accompany it, in­cluding gridiron, frying—pan, griddle, and bake—oven.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

           

 

 

 

 

 

 

          RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM.                                   91

 

Light and portable, the whole is fitted into a cask which secures its transportation without fear of injury. The fire is made in a few moments from a few short faggots which are placed in the stove when starting on the march in the morning after breakfast; so that, in half an hour after coming into camp, the men may all have hot coffee, and go to bed. This stove is made in New York, and may be procured from the agent, No. 13 Broadway.

 

 

PRESERVED MEATSAND OTHER FOOD.

 

 

The great difficulty of transporting provisions in bulk without their becoming damaged by exposure to the wet, and therefore unfit for use, causing serious inconvenience, and often impeding materially the operations of a cam­paign, renders it eminently desirable that such food, as­similating to the ration, as can be prepared in a condensed form should be procured. Samples of preserved and con­densed food have been submitted to careful examination and test by competent and reliable officers, and found to answer all the purposes for which they are intended, and can therefore be safely recommended for campaign use.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER IX.

 

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

FIELD WORKS are any constructions which have for their object to impede the advance of an enemy, or to enable an inferior force to maintain their position against the at­tack of a superior number.

The name of field fortifications is applied to a work which is composed of an embankment of earth called a “parapet,” and an excavation called a “ditch,” on the exterior side, which last furnishes the earth for the em­bankment.

The outline or form of the work varies with the character of the ground, the circumstances under which it is constructed, the strength of the force, and particular char­acter of the defence. The profile or shape of the embank­ment or parapet is usually the same in all eases.

When the ground about a work within effective range of the fire-arms of the attacking party is quite flat, the height, called the “command” of the work, must be at least 7 feet 6 inches, in order that the defenders may ho covered from the fire of men on horseback—that class of troops being able to discharge their arms at 7 feet 6 inches above the ground.

Unimportant works, or such as are situated on higher ground than that within effective artillery range, may have their parapets as low as 6 feet, or even 5feet.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                      93

 

Fig. 1.—Plate 2 shows the ordinary form of’ the profile of an intrenchment, in soils of which the natural slope is one perpendicular to one base.

A B C DE F is the profile of the Parapet.

G H I Jthe profile of the Ditch.

L M N the profile of the Glacis.

A B the Banquette Slopes.

B C Tread of the Banquette.

C D the Interior Slope.

D E the Superior Slope.

E F the Exterior Slope.

F G the Berm.

G Hthe Scarp.

H I the Bottom of the Ditch.

I J the Counterscarp.

A the Foot of the Banquette Slope.

B the Crest of the Banquette.

C the Foot of the Interior Slope.

D the Interior Crest.

E the Exterior Crest.

F the Foot of the Exterior Slope.

G the Crest of the Scarp.

H the Foot of the Scarp.

I  the Foot of the Counterscarp.

J the Crest of the Counterscarp.

L the Crest of the Glacis.

M the Foot of the Glacis.

 

Fig. 2 shows the general plan of intrenchments with flanking arrangements.

 

A B C and F G H are the Advanced Parts.

C D E F are the Retired Parts.

A B, B C, F G, and G H are the Faces.

C D and E F are the Flanks.

D E the Curtain.

E B and D G the Lines of Defence.

A B C and F G H are the Salient Angles.

C D E and D E F the Re-entering Angles.

C D E and B E F the Angles of Defence.

b Ac and e F g the Sectors without Fire.

L M and N R the Capitals.

 

Sometimes the parapet* is formed of earth taken from

 

*          In this manner cover for troops may be very quickly obtained, with the advantage of having the power to advance over the parapet in order of battle when occasion offers.

 

 

 

 

 

94.                                                      FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

an excavation or trench inside of it; in this case a parapet may be as low as 3 feet, because, then, the defenders standing in the trench of equal depth, and close behind the parapet, are sufficiently covered by it.

Should there be ground near the position to be forti­fied, higher than that on which the parapet stands, the latter must then have a greater command than 7 feet 6 inches, but in the more simple kind of field works the command does not exceed 12 feet; for as soldiers cannot easily throw earth with a shovel to a greater height than 6 feet, and as other means are generally wanting in the field, it is evident that the height of a parapet for such a work, must be limited by the capability of executing it with shovels and pickaxes by two parties of men, one standing on a level 6 feet above the other. The same reason determines the greatest depth of ditch to be 12 feet, a scaffolding being necessary at 6 feet above the bot­tom of the ditch to receive the earth which is thrown from thence; the earth is then thrown up to the level of the ground, by other laborers placed on the scaffolding.

In the construction of field works it should always be recollected that a great command of parapet not only requires additional means, trouble, and time to throw up the earth, but also renders necessary an increased mass of earth for the banquette, which may thus encumber the interior of the work.

To obviate, as much as possible, the latter evil, it is usual to mount the banquette by steps, when the parapet has a greater command than 8 feet.

The thickness of the parapets of field works must be regulated by the description of arms likely to be employed against them; in order, therefore, that they may afford a reasonable degree of resistance to repeated firing, the

 

 

 

 

 

 

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                   95

 

 

thickness of parapets must somewhat exceed the penetra­tion of’ the shot which may be used in the attack.

          Penetration of shot.           Thickness of parapet.
         
Musket baIl, 10 to 18 inches.  3 feet.
          6—pounder) 3 ½ to 4 feet.      6 feet.
          9—pounder, 6 ½ to 7 feet.      8 or 9 feet.
          12—pounder, 8 ½ to 10 feet.  10 or 12 feet.

 

It is found by experiment that loose earth resists the penetration of shot just as well as that which has been rammed together.

Although a musket ball penetrates, at most, only 18 inches into earth, musketry parapets require to he made 3 feet thick, in order that they may be sufficiently substantial to preserve the requisite height, notwithstand­ing the action of the weather.

Heavier guns than 12-pounders are rarely brought into the field, consequently 12 feet may be considered as the greatest thickness of a parapet; and it has been shown that, for the simpler works, 12 feet is the greatest command of a parapet, and likewise the greatest depth of a ditch.

The exterior side of a parapet is formed with a slope which has a base equal to its height, that being the in­clination which (ordinary) earth assumes when thrown up loosely; and, therefore, it is the most advantageous form for a mass of earth whose sides are unsupported.

The interior slope of a parapet has a base not greater than one-third or one-fourth of its height, in order to allow the men to approach near the crest, and to fire over the parapet with ease.

As newly moved earth will not remain at such a steep slope without support, it must be retained in that state by a revetment.

The REVETMENT is commonly made with gabions, fas-

 

 

 

 

96                                                     FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

cines, sand-bags, or sods of turf; or again with hurdles, casks, trunks of trees, and occasionally with doors, shut­ters, &c., from any neighboring houses. Trunks of trees are objectionable as a revetment for the interior slope, on account of the splinters that fly from them when struck by shot; and large trees, laid horizontally to revet the escarp or counterscarp, are defective, because they serve as steps for the assailants.

GABIONS are strong cylindrical baskets without top or bottom, 2 feet in diameter, and 2 feet 9 inches in height. These are placed in rows along the line of work at an inclination corresponding to the required slope, and then filled with earth. To make a gabion, from eight to four­teen pickets, 3 feet 6 inches long, are fixed upright in the ground, at equal distances, in the circumference of a circle, 1 foot 11 inches in diameter; flexible twigs (or rods) are then interwoven with the upright pickets, commencing with three rods at the bottom, and weaving each in succes­sion outside of two pickets and inside of one; as the twigs (or rods) are expended, others are added, and the basket work continued to the height of 2 feet 9 inches; this work (which is called the web) is sewn in three or four parts, from top to bottom; withes, (called gads,) or spun-yarn being used for that purpose, in order to keep it from coming off the pickets; the ends of these are then cut off about an inch from the web. A gabion, thus made, stands 3 feet high in the revetment, and weighs from 36 to 40 lbs. The best wood for the web, and particularly for the gads, is willow and hazel.

FASCINES are military faggots, 18 feet long and 9 inches in diameter: they can be sawed into shorter lengths, and are sometimes made only 6 feet long.

To make a fascine, two trestles (like a St. Andrew’s cross) are fixed in the ground at 16 feet apart; then

 

 

 

 

 

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                     97

 

three or four other trestles (according to the length and thickness of the brushwood) are placed at equal distances between the two first trestles, and in a direct line with them; brushwood is next laid along the trestles, (the smallest inside,) so as to project 17 or 18 inches beyond the extreme trestles, and is compressed to a diameter of 9 inches by means of an instrument called a choker;* the brushwood is bound with gads, (before the choker is re­laxed,) at 6 inches beyond the extreme trestles, and at in­termediate intervals of I5 ½ inches, and the ends of the fascine are sawed off square, at 1 foot beyond the extreme trestles.

FASCINE GADS are tough and flexible twigs, 5feet long, very much twisted to render them fit for tying. A squad of five men can, in an hour, make a fascine which weighs (when of tolerably dry material) from 140 to 160 lbs. If, however, the brushwood is green, and much thicker than a mail’s thumb, it will weigh 200 lbs. The fascines forming a revetment are fastened in their position, (one above another) by pickets 3 ½ or 4 feet long, which are driven obliquely downwards through the fascine so as to form an angle of 450 with the slope. The pickets should be in the proportion of 6 to an 18—inch fascine, of which two are driven vertically, in order to fasten each fascine to that. which is beneath it.

Two gabions make nearly the same quantity of revet­ment as an 18-inch fascine, and consume but half the quantity of materials; moreover, they require only common laborers to form them into a revetment, and stand in their positions without pickets or other fastenings ; they also make a more durable revetment than fascines or sand-bags.

 

*The choker consists of 4 feet of chain, with a wooden lever at each end.  On the chain is marked, by rings, a length of 2 ½ inches, being a circumference equivalent nearly, to a diameter of 9 inches.

 

 

 

 

 

98.                                                     FIELD FORTlFlCATI0NS.

 

As fascines are heavy, require pickets to fasten them, and experienced men to build them in revetment; as, moreover, each fascine takes twice as much material as two gabions, which, together, will make a revetment of equal superficies, it is evident that fascines are inferior to gabions for the formation of revetments, although they support the earth at the same slope, viz., with a base equal to one-quarter of its height.

SAND-BAGS are bags of coarse canvas, measuring, when empty and laid flat, 2 feet 8 inches by 1 foot 4 inches; they contain, when quite full, a bushel of earth; but when tied and placed in revetment, only three-quarters of a bushel. In building a revetment with them they are ar­ranged with their ends and sides presented alternately to the front in each course, and with the joints in the succes­sive courses broken, like brickwork. Sixteen sand-bags build 10 square feet of revetment; they ought to be tarred, if the revetments are to last a considerable time ; if not tarred, they rot in two months. An empty sand-bag weighs 1 lb. 2 oz., and when tarred 1 lb. 12 oz.

Filled sand-bags are musket-shot proof, and are fre­quently placed on a parapet, one across two others, the latter being a short distance asunder, in order that the in­tervals may serve as loopholes.

Gun batteries are sometimes made entirely of sand­-bags, which are filled at a distance and brought to the place ; this may be done either to save time, or when earth cannot be procured on the spot, in consequence of the soil being rocky or marshy.

On naval expeditions sand-bags are very serviceable, as there is no other way in which a battery can be promptly formed on a shore.

When sand-bags or gabions are made use of to revet the cheeks of embrasures, they should be covered with

 

 

 

 

 

 

FIELD F0RTIFICATIONS.                                                     99

 

raw hides, to prevent them from being damaged by the flash and the concussion caused by the discharge of the guns.

 

SODS OF TURF, being generally procurable on the spot, are much used in the revetments of the slopes of field works; but there are strong objections to sod revetments, particularly as they take three times as long to build as a brick wall.

Good sods ought to be cut 16 inches long, 8 inches wide, and 4 inches thick; they are built up in the same manner as bricks, and with the grass downwards, and are fastened with pickets long enough to penetrate three courses. Six sods build 2 square feet of revetment. A sod revetment requires most labor; revetments of sand­bags, fascines, and gabions, require successively less; the last is the best in all respects; a sod revetment retains the earth at a slope of one-third only, the three others at a slope of one-fourth.

The parapet is bounded on its upper surface by a plane called the superior slope ;this declines towards the counterscarp, in order to enable the defenders to see and fire on the assailants (directly) until they descend  into the ditch. The amount of this slope is called the “plongee,” and this varies from one-sixth to one-fourth of the thickness of the parapet, but it must not exceed one-fourth in order that the crest * of the parapet may not become too weak.

It is of great importance that the superior slope should be directed to the counter-scarp, as it then enables the defenders, notwithstanding the smoke and confusion con­sequent on an attack, to direct their fire with certainty to

 

*      It has been found by experience that a soldier cannot depress his musket, when firing, more than 150 below a horizontal plane, and a plongee of one-fourth of the thickness of the parapet gives a depression of 150; this is an additional reason for limiting the pIongee to one—fourth of the thickness of the parapet.

 

 

 

 

 

 

100                                                  FIELD FORTIFICATI0NS.

 

 

a spot where the assailants’ columns must be, more or less, detained by the ditch and the obstacles in it.

If the superior slope cannot be directed to the edge of the counterscarp without making the plongee more than one-fourth of the thickness of the parapet, the counterscarp must be raised by means of a small glacis. The crest of this glacis, however, should be kept at least 4 feet below the crest of the parapet of the work, that the assail­ants, when on the glacis, may not have the power of firing into the work.

The outer edge of the superior slope is called the “exterior crest,” whilst the inner (and upper) edge of the same slope is called the “interior crest,” or the “crest” of the parapet.

A step, called a “banquette,” is placed at the foot of the interior slope, and from 4 feet 3 inches to 4 feet 6 inches below the crest, in order to enable the defenders to fire with ease over the parapet, and in the direction of its superior slope.

The terreplein, or tread of the banquette, is made 3 feet wide for one rank of men, and 4 feet wide if intended for two ranks. In order that the men on it may descend backwards with ease, there is a gentle * slope for that purpose, having a base equal to twice the height of the banquette.

The ditch is not excavated immediately at the foot of the exterior slope of the parapet, but at a distance from it, varying from 1 to 4 feet, according to the adhesiveness of’ the soil. This space of unmoved earth is called the berme, and it is requisite both to remove the pressure of the parapet from the immediate edge of the ditch, and to facili-

 

*It the parapet has a greater command than 8 feet, this convenience is relinquished on account of the great space occupied by it, and the banquette is seconded by steps.

 

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                101

 

 

tate the construction and repair of the parapet. A berme has the defect of affording an intermediate landing-place on which the assailants may form; and although it may be occupied by obstacles, these require additional labor, and may he destroyed by cannon; yet a berme can scarcely be dispensed with unless the earth is very adhesive, and that the parapet is not more than 8 feet high.

The berme, in most cases, may be cut away after the parapet has had two or three days to settle.

The ditch will not be an effective obstacle if less than 6 feet in depth, and for the reason given, it is not made deeper than 12 feet.

The sides of the ditch being of unmoved earth, they will support themselves, without revetment, at a steeper slope than those of the parapet; and as the counterscarp has not the weight of the parapet to resist, and is not exposed to lire, it may, generally, be made steeper than the escarp.

The slopes of both vary from a base equal to the height to a base of one quarter of the height.

To find the breadth of the ditch, (of the usual shape,) divide the area of a profile of the parapet by the intended * depth of the ditch, and the quotient is the mean breadth of the latter; to this, add half die sum of the bases of the escarp and counterscarp slopes for the breadth at top, and deduct the same half sum for the breadth at bottom.

The best shape for an unflanked ditch is one having a triangular section, as it does not permit the assailants to form at the bottom; and moreover, with an equal depth and area of section, it may be made wider at top than a trapezoid would be; by which means the superior slope of the parapet can be directed to the counterscarp without

 

This is determined chiefly by the nature of the soil and the size of the parapet.

 

 

 

 

102                                                    FIELD F0RTIFICATI0NS.

 

too much increasing the plong6c, or without raising the counterscarp by a glacis.

To find the breadth of a ditch having a triangular section, divide the area of a profile of the parapet by half the given depth of ditch, and the quotient is the required breadth at top; the sides may evidently have any given inclinations to the horizon consistently with the given breadth, depth, and area of a transverse section.

 

 

THE OUTLINES OF FIELD WORKS.

 

 

The direction which a parapet is made to assume in order to enclose, or partially enclose, the ground to he fortified, is called the outline of a work.

The following are general principles to be observed in determining the outlines of field works:

1st. There should be a reciprocal defence between all the parts of works, so that the ground over which an enemy must pass to the attack should, if possible, be seen both in front and in flank.

2dly. The lines of defence” must not exceed the effective range of muskets, viz., about 160 yards.

3dly. Re-entering * angles (viz., flanking angles) ought never to be less than 900 and seldom more than 1000; for, if less than 900, the men on the flanking parts would fire against each other; and if more than 1000, the fire of the flanking parts would diverge too far from the salient to be flanked.

4thly. The salient angles of works should be as obtuse as possible, and never less than 600, otherwise the interior space might become too contracted; the angle would be so sharp as to be quickly worn away by the weather, and

 

*In both these cases it is presumed that the soldier fires (as he generally does,) at right angles to the parapet behind which he stands.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

               FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 103

 

 

would be easily battered down; also the * undefended sectoral space in front of the salient angle (which is the supplement of the angle) would become very great; and

5thly. The outline of a field work should be propor­tioned in length to the number of men and guns intended for its defence. One man occupies a space of three feet.

The names of the works most commonly employed in field fortification are redans, single, double, and triple; redans with auxiliary flanks; lunettes, redoubts, star forts, bastioned and demi-bastioned forts, block-houses, and works used mostly for lines of intrenchment, such as tenailles and cremailleres.

The REDAN is a work consisting of two faces,which form with each other a salient angle, the rear being open. When the faces are not more than about 20 yards in length, the work is sometimes called a fleche.

The redan is in the most advantageous position when the ground before the salient angle, and approaches to the gorge, are inaccessible, or when the work can be sup­ported by troops; for example, when, with obstacles in its front, it is employed as an advanced work to defend hollow ground which cannot be seen from the principal work—to protect a bridge, a dam, a road, a defile, or to cover a guard, an advanced post, &c:

The weak points of this work are: that it has an open gorge, and that its ditch, and the ground in front of the salient angle, are undefended either by direct or flanking fire.

On account of its having an open gorge, it is seldom advisable to construct a redan as an isolated work; its rear should be exposed to the fire of some collateral work,

 

*      Undefended by direct fire. To prevent the enemy from approaching the work on these undefended sectors the salients should be directed towards some natural obstacle, such as a marsh, &c.; or if this cannot be done, then artificial obstacles should be disposed in their front.

 

v

 

104                                                  FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

or have free communication with a body of troops in its rear, to whom it may form an advanced post, or outwork; otherwise the faces should terminate on a river, a marsh, or any inaccessible ground, which would prevent it from being turned.

The first defect, viz., that of having an open gorge, may be remedied in a slight degree by placing along the gorge abatis, trous de loup, &c., (or palisades, if time and materials abound;) as for the second defect, a direct fire may be brought in front of the salient either by rounding the latter, or by cutting off the angle by a short face not less than 6 yards long.

A flanking fire may be procured for the ditch and sa­lients, by forming auxiliary flanks, which may be placed either towards the middle or at the extremities of the faces; such a flank ought not to be less than 12 yards long, that there may be, at least, 12 men firing from it.

DOUBLE REDANS consist of two redans joined together, their exterior faces being generally longer than the others: the French call a work of this kind a queue d’ hyronde.

A TRIPLE REDAN consists of three redans joined to­gether, the exterior faces of these are also, in general, longer than the others.

A LUNETTE is a large redan with flanks parallel or nearly parallel to the capital; as a general rule, the flanks are traced perpendicularly to the intended line of fire, for the purpose of bringing on certain ‘spots a more direct fire than could be made from the faces of the work.

It is often desirable to secure the gorges of these works against surprise; this may be done by disposing across the gorge a single or double row of palisades, or a stockade-work, in the form of a front fortification or of a tenaille: there should be a banquette to it, that the defenders may have a command over the assailants, and a ditch to

 

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                105

 

 

prevent the enemy from getting close, and cutting, burning, or blowing down the obstacle. Trous de loup, abatis, and chevaux-de-frise are sometimes disposed across the gorge for the same purpose.

A REDOUBT is a closed work, the parapet of which does not form re-entering angles; it may be quadrilateral, polygonal, or circular.

Circular redoubts, although they have no undefended sectors, and enclose a greater space than any other re­doubt with an equal length of parapet, are seldom formed on account of’ the difficulty of their construction, and also because their ditches are incapable off any flanking de­fence; the lines of fire diverging from the parapet, any one spot on the ground is very imperfectly defended.

A four-sided figure is the best and most usual form for a redoubt, because it is of simple construction; the ditches are more easily flanked, and there are not so many points of attack as in a redoubt of a greater num­ber of angles. Redoubts, being closed works, are better calculated to stand detached than redans or lunettes, and are, therefore, constructed when a small work is required without any immediate protection from the gorge—the armed party being strong enough to complete and man a four-sided redoubt, each side of which is not less than 15 yards long.

The size depends on the number of men who are to garrison it, and upon the number of guns which it is to contain; also upon the length of time during which it is to be occupied: this may be for a few hours only, (as on a field of battle,) or for a period of weeks or months.

If wanted only for a few hours, it will be sufficient to allow 3 feet in length of parapet for every man of the de­tachment; or for every two men, if they are to be formed in double rank. If guns are to be placed in the work, 15

 

 

 

 

 

106                                                   FIELD F0RTIFICATIONS.

 

 

feet of parapet must be given to each, in order that the gunners may have sufficient room on each side to work it.

But when the redoubt is destined to contain a body of men for a considerable length of time, it becomes neces­sary to have room for them to lie down within the ban­quette with their arms and packs; supposing one-third to be on guard, patrolling, &c, two square yards, in addi­tion to the slope of the banquette, are sufficient for each man, and 36 square yards for each gun with its appoint­ments.

The rule, consequently, for a square redoubt is: to multiply the given number of men by 2, and the number of guns by 36, for the number of square yards which the work ought to contain within the foot of its banquette, the square root of the product will be the length in yards of the side of the square forming that area; adding to this result the breadth of two interior slopes, and of 2 banquettes with their slopes, (about 7 yards altogether,) we shall have the side of the square formed by the crest of the parapet.

A square redoubt ought not to be traced with less extent of side than 15 yards; for, by employing the cal­culation explained above, it will be found that such a work is only just sufficient to contain the men necessary for its defence: on the other hand, it is unusual to make a square redoubt with a longer side than 40 yards, because it would require a garrison more suitable to a work of a stronger outline.

The imperfections of redoubts are, that they are en­tirely without a flanking fire for the defence of the ground in front of their faces, also that their ditches and the sectoral spaces before the angles are without any fire what­ever for their defence.

A flanking defence for the ditches may be obtained by

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

               FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 107

 

 

placing palisade or stockade caponnieres in them, either at the angles or in the middle of the faces; by tambours in a like position, or by loop-holed galleries under the counterscarp at the salients of the work.

The want of a fire in the directions of the capitals may be remedied, as in the redan, by cutting off an angle by a short face, by making it curved, or by tracing a portion of the line of parapet en cremaillere; viz., by disposing it in a succession of salient and re-entering angles, the sides of which are alternately parallel to the capital: this con­struction is, however, very difficult, and causes inconven­ient variations in the thickness and height of the parapet.

A ditch caponniere is an oblong structure formed with palisades, or with stockade work, loopholed, and roofed over with planks and earth to secure the men from the effects of shells, and a plunging fire from the counterscarp. It ought, if possible, to be flanked with musketry, to pre­vent an enemy from closing on it, and getting under cover.

The best position for a caponniere in the ditch of a re­doubt is at the salient angle, as then one caponniere flanks two branches of the ditch. It should be separated from the counterscarp by an enlargement of the ditch, to pre­vent an enemy from using it as a bridge to cross the ditch, and it ought to have a wicket to allow of sallies into the ditch.

The bottom or sole of the caponniere may, sometimes with advantage, be sunk 3 or 4 feet below the bottom of the ditch, in order that the fire from the loopholes may graze along it, and prevent an enemy from closing on them; by this construction, and by making the roof con­vex, it becomes more difficult for him to use the capon­niere as a bridge to pass the ditch.

To lessen the destructive effect of shells, traverses

 

 

 

 

 

 

108                                                   FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

should be placed in all closed works when those missiles are likely to be employed against them.

From the interior to the exterior of closed works there must be a passage through the parapet, protected by a traverse or by stockade work, and the traverse should extend far enough on each side of the passage to intercept shot which might enter it obliquely. The ditch is crossed by a bridge which is conveniently formed of loose planks and beams, because, in case of attack, they can be quickly taken up and used to barricade the passage. When the ditch is more than twelve feet wide, a trestle must be placed in the middle to support the beams or sleepers.

When rough timber only can be procured, stout straight limbs of trees must be selected for the sleepers, which may be covered with strong hurdles, (or brush. wood,) over which a layer of sods and then a small quan­tity of gravel may be laid.

A STAR FORT is a closed work, the parapet of which forms several acute salient angles and. obtuse re-entering angles, giving it a form like the usual representation of a star.

It has been seen that redoubts are defended only by direct fire, and that without some contrivance for affording flanking fire, the sectors at the salients, as well as the ditches, are absolutely undefended. Star forts, consisting of re-entering as well as salient angles, are intended to obviate that defect in some degree. They may be con­structed either upon an exterior or interior polygon. If’ ground is to be fortified which does not admit the possi­bility of working outwards, as an island for instance, a polygon is traced to suit the form of the ground; the sides of the polygon are bisected by perpendiculars drawn inwards, and the faces of the star fort are drawn from the

 

 

 

 

 

 

               FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 109

 

 

angles of the polygon to the inner extremities of the per­pendiculars: this is called fortifying upon the exterior polygon.

The length of the perpendicular * in a square, penta­gon, hexagon, and octagon, should be respectively one­ eighth, one-fifth, one-fourth, and one-third of the side, in order that the flanking angles may approach as near as possible to right angles, without making the salient angles less than 600. When the polygon is irregular, the length of the perpendiculars must be determined by the angles nearest to them.

Again, it may be required to surround a building with a star fort in such a position that the work could not be traced inwards; then, a polygon surrounding the building must be laid down, and on each of its sides an equilateral triangle must be formed towards the exterior.

If this construction be applied to a dodecagon, it will be found that the re-entering angles are exactly right an­gles; in an octagonal fort the re-entering or flanking angles are each equal to 1050.

The necessity for employing a polygon superior to an octagon will rarely occur; yet with irregular figures it may happen that some of the angles are equal, or nearly so, to those of regular polygons of more than twelve sides.

It is necessary to fix some limit as a minimum to the length of face for these works; this depends on the dis­tance at which a shot fired from the parapet of a face would reach the level of the ground; for it is evident that if the face he made less than that distance, the enemy, arrived at the rounding of the counterscarp, will be more or less secure from the fire of the adjoining facet If we

 

*The lengths given are merely approximations in the form of the nearest simple fraction of the side.

 

 

 

 

110                                                    FIELD FORTIFICATI0NS.

 

 

suppose a man to fire along the superior slope of a para­pet with a plongee of one-sixth, and that the work has a command of seven and a half feet, we have by similar triangles,

1: 6 : : 7 ½  (the command) : 45;

 

the distance, in feet, at which the shot would reach the level of the ground.

The face should, therefore, not be less than 45 feet, viz., 15 yards. If the bottom of the ditch on any face is to be defended by the fire of the next face, a still greater length is required: to find this, we have the proportion 1 : 6 : : the relief (the height of the crest of the parapet above the bottom of the ditch): the distance at which a shot would reach the bottom of the ditch; this distance is 30 yards when the command of the work and depth of its ditch are both seven and a half feet: The length of the faces depends also upon the number of guns to be placed behind the parapet, and upon the strength of the garrison; but 35 yards may be considered as the greatest length of face, for the troops required to defend a star fort having a longer face would be sufficient to construct and defend a fort of a better tracing.

The construction of star forts is attended with some trouble, particularly if the ground is uneven: such works present at their acute salient angles numerous points of attack: the faces and salients are without flanking defence when the polygon is inferior to an octagon, and even in this case such defence is imperfect: the ditches are unde­fended, unless the faces are made unreasonably long; the line of parapet to be manned is very great, when compared with the interior space, and is exposed to be enfiladed in all directions.

 

 

 

 

 

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 111

 

 

 

CONSTRUCTIONS.

 

 

The following are convenient methods of tracing on the ground the most useful polygonal redoubts and star forts:

For a pentagonal redoubt: on a base equal to one-fifth of the perimeter, or length of the parapet, form an isosceles triangle, of which each of’ the equal sides is one— third of the perimeter, and on each side of this triangle as a base form another isosceles triangle with its (equal) sides, each equal to the side of the pentagon, or first base.

For a hexagonal redoubt: trace an equilateral triangle, the side of which is in length three times that of the re­doubt; trisect each side, and join the nearest outer extremities of the centre portions: these lines, with those which join their extremities, will constitute the hexagonal redoubt required.

For a hexagonal star fort: trace an equilateral triangle on a base equal to one-fourth of the whole length of the parapet; trisect each side, and form equilateral triangle on the three centre portions. These will complete the figure.

For an octagonal redoubt: trace a square on a side equal to three-tenths of the whole length of parapet of the redoubt; and from the angles of the square measure on each side half the diagonal; the points being joined, the magistral line is traced.

For an octagonal star fort: trace a square on a base equal to three-twentieths of the whole length of the parapet of the star fort ; with this square form an octagon as before, and on each of its sides trace an equilateral triangle.

FORTS WITH BASTI0N8 are the most perfect of closed field works, as it is evident that they possess all the ad-

 

 

 

 

 

 

112                                                   FIELD FORTICATIONS.

 

vantages of mutual defence afforded by the corresponding works in permanent fortifications; they are traced simi­larly to these last, although rarely on a polygon superior to a pentagon; as; however, their defence mainly depends on the fire of common muskets, their lines of defence must not exceed the effective range of such arms, or about 100 yards, and therefore the side of the polygon on which they are constructed must not exceed 200 yards in length.

On the other hand, the side of the polygon should not be less than 120 yards in length; since, if it were so, the bastions would be too small, and the flanks and curtain too short for the defence required from them.

Bastioned forts should have within them a good re­duit, in order to give confidence to the garrison, and secure its retreat: such a reduit should have a command of four or five feet over every part of the main work, in order that the enemy, having gained the parapet of the latter, may not fire from thence into the reduit.

The reduit may either conform to the outline of the fort, or it may be a simple redoubt, a blockhouse, or a tower of brick or stone, so traced that the defenders may fire into the bastions of the fort, these being the points at which an enemy is most likely to force an entrance.

As bastioned forts require a strong garrison, they are constructed when it is intended to occupy a point of im­portance for a considerable time, and, therefore, the reduit often forms, at the same time, the barrack of the garrison.

In order to throw an additional fire towards the direc­tion of the salients, the curtain is sometimes broken in the prolongation of the line of defence; but in order that some fire may be directed immediately in front, a portion may be formed in a line parallel to the original curtain, and equal to about one-third of its length; the two bri­sures should form with each other a re-entering rather

 

 

 

 

 

      FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                113.

 

 

than a salient angle, in order that there may be no dead spaces in the ditch.

The counterscarp of the ditch may be drawn either to the shoulder angles of the bastions, as in permanent forti­fication, or parallel to the faces, flanks, and curtain; the latter method is generally preferable, as it saves time and labor; in this case, however, the counterscarp of one flank would conceal the ditch of the nearest face from the fire of the opposite flank; this counterscarp ought, therefore, in part, to be cut away in an inclined plane, or ramp, parallel to, or coinciding with, the line of fire from that flank.

DEMI-BASTIONED FORTS, like those with bastions, are traced by letting fall a perpendicular from the middle of each exterior side, and drawing lines of defence; but each front has only one flank, every alternate face extending from the angle of the polygon to the inner extremity of that flank, and coinciding with the line of defence through­out its entire length; such works have the defect of af­fording a regular flanking defence only to every alternate face; as the short face of each front receives a very oblique and imperfect flanking defence from the collateral long face.

LOOPHOLES are narrow rectangular openings made in walls of masonry or wood, through which to direct a fire of musketry. In walls of two feet or two and a half feet thick they are about nine inches high by fifteen inches wide on the inside, and twenty inches high by four inches wide on the outside. In timber six or eight inches thick they are eight inches wide inside and three inches outside, the height being twelve inches.

They are made wider on the inside than on the out­side, because, thus formed, they afford better cover for the men behind them; they are placed at not less than

 

 

 

 

 

 

114                                                    FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

three feet asunder, that the wall may not be too much weakened, and that the men firing through them may not be crowded; they are made from four feet to four and a quarter feet above the banquette or ground on which the men stand to fire through them.

STOCKADE WORK is a wall composed of trunks of trees, or rough pieces of timber placed upright in the ground; they are made to touch each other, and loopholes are cut through them; if composed of trees, they ought to be squared, that the parts in contact may be of the same thickness as the rest of the wall.

A TAMBOUR is an enclosure of palisades or stockade work, sometimes with a ditch and banquette, and of any form that may be necessary to afford the defence re­quired.

BLOCKHOUSES are covered field works, generally rec­tangular; the walls are formed of trunks of trees, and above the timbers of the roof there is, usually, a bed of earth, three or four feet thick.

In mountainous and well-wooded countries blockhouses are the best description of field works, because the enemy cannot easily bring cannon to destroy them. It is very difficult in mountainous countries to find ground where works may be constructed free from the defect of being commanded, and consequently open works are there com­paratively useless.

Blockhouses are of great advantage as reduits in situ­ations where it is difficult to defilade the interiors of works from commanding heights, more especially since they many serve as barracks for the troops; in such a case the bed­steads, arranged on each side, are used as banquettes, and the loopholes are made four feet above them.

A blockhouse to resist musketry should be composed of trees, squared so that the parts in contact may be at

 

 

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 115

 

least six inches thick, that being the depth to which a mus­ket ball will penetrate in fir. In order to resist artillery, two rows of trees (or of stockades) are placed vertically in the ground, with an interval between them from three to six feet wide, which is filled with earth well rammed: The trees or logs should he eleven or twelve feet long, so that they may be limited at least three feet in the ground, and allow the interior of the blockhouse to be eight or nine feet high ; it should also be from eighteen to twenty-four feet wide in the interior.

The earth used to render the covering shell-proof may be shaped like a small parapet, and from this an additional fire (of musketry) may he obtained; the access to this upper parapet is through a trap-door in the roof. To prevent the blockhouse from being set on fire, a ditch should be dug round it, leaving a berme of eight or ten feet, and on this the earth is piled up against the wood as high as the loop­holes.

Sometimes blockhouses are constructed in the form of a cross, when the flanking fire thus obtained on their faces renders them much more powerful ; they are also, occa­sionally, built with an upper story, the angles of which should project over the sides of the lower story; the foot of the lower walls may thus be defended by the fire from above.

An ordinary dwelling-house,with thick masonry walls, may be formed into a blockhouse by pulling down the upper stories, and heaping a mass of the materials, three or four feet in thickness, over the ceiling of the lower rooms; earth or rubbish should also be placed about the house as high as the loopholes.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

116                                                   FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

 

DEFILADING OF FIELD WORKS.

 

To DEFILADE a work from a height, is so to regulate the direction and elevation of the parapets or covering masses, that its interior may be screened from the view of an enemy on the heights.

A PLANE OF SIGHT is an imaginary plane supposed to pass through the summit of the height from which the work is to be defiladed, and the terreplein of the work.

A PLANE OF DEFILADE is a plane supposed to pass through the crest of the parapet of the work parallel to the plane of sight.

In many situations it is practicable (and then it is the easier method) to defilade the faces or longest branches of a work by the tracing; viz., by directing them on marshes, rivers, lakes, precipices, hollows, &c., where batteries cannot be erected, or at worst, on points of the height not nearer than 800 * yards to the work. Also the choice of the outline of the work should be attended to; for among the different tracings by which the same object may be attained, some will be more easy to defilade than others.

When a work is thrown up in front of a height, it is the more difficult to defilade in proportion to its depth; it should, therefore, have an oblong form, and its longest faces should be traced parallel to the height. If, for in­stance, the work were a rectangular redoubt, the long faces should be traced parallel to the height, and the short ones be directed on it.

An open work will be defiladed when the plane of de­-

 

*Artillery on a height, even or 120 feet, at 800 yards distance from a work, has no more advantage, in respect of a plunging fire, than if it were on a level with the rock; for in both cases it must be elevated about 1 ¼ degree to attain this range.

 

 

 

 

 

               FIELD F0RTIFICATIONS.                                                   117

 

 

filement passes through a line 8 feet above the ground at its gorge, and at a point 4 or 8 * feet above the command­ing hill, according as the work is to be defiladed against artillery or musketry.

It is usual to defilade a work against musketry if there are heights within 200 yards of it, and against artillery, when the heights are not farther distant than 800 yards.

When the commanding ground is not occupied by the enemy, the work may be defiladed in the following man­ner: stretch a rope between two poles planted in the line of the gorge at 8 feet above the ground; direct visual rays from various points of this rope to the top of a pole placed on the commanding hill, and 4 feet high if the work is to be defiladed against artillery, but 8 feet if it is to be defiladed against musketry; the intersection of the rays with poles planted on the tracing of the intended parapet, will indicate the height to which the parapet must be raised in order that its defenders may be situated under the plane of defilade; and since these visual rays represent lines of fire from the enemy’s position on the hill, it will be evident that a parapet whose height is thus determined will defilade the interior of the work.

When it, is impossible to place the pole on the com­manding ground, the following method must be adopted: along the gorge of the intended work stretch a rope, which is to be 4 feet above the ground if the work is to be de­fended against artillery, and 1 ½ feet if against musketry; in rear of this rope at any convenient distance (about 5 yards) drive two pickets into the ground, and upon them raise or lower a cord or a straight edge of wood, until it is in the same plane with the rope at the gorge, and the

 

*A field-gun stands about 3 ½ feet above the ground, and a man on horse back can fire about 7 ½ , feet above the ground; therefore 4 and 8 are taken as the nearest whole numbers to these commands respectively.

 

 

 

118                                                   FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

top of the height from which the work is to be defiladed; then look from the rear cord or straight edge along that at the gorge, and observe where the line of sight from thence cuts the poles raised on the tracing of the intended parapet; these points of section (indicating the position of the plane of sight) may be marked by one of the party; lastly, make the crest of the parapet 4 feet higher than the points thus found if the work is to be defiladed against cannon, but 6 ½  feet higher if against musketry.

If it is found that, by this process, the parapet must have more than 12 feet command in order to defilade the work; the parapet must be raised to any convenient height, (suppose 10 or 12 feet,) and then, in order to defi­lade the part which is not protected by the parapet, a traverse must be erected, or the terreplein of the unpro­tected part must be lowered, or both of these steps must be taken conjointly.

In defilading a tete de pont, the plane of defilade should pass 8 feet above that part of the bridge which is most remote from the height.

To defilade a closed work, (or one with a parapet both on the side nearest to and on the side furthest from the height,) unless the crests on both those si4es are in a plane passing 8 feet above the ground which the enemy may occupy, in front and in rear, a parados to cover the defenders on the banquette of the side nearest to the height from reverse fire, is indispensable; for it is clear that the higher the parapet nearest to a commanding ground is raised in order to defilade a portion of the whole of the interior of the work, the more will the defenders standing on the banquette of that parapet be elevated above the plane of defilement of the parapet furthest from the height, (or the lower one;) they will, consequently, be-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

               FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 119

 

 

come exposed to a reverse fire directed over the lower parapet.

In this case, therefore, make the parapet nearest to the commanding ground as high as convenient, and so as to defilade a portion (suppose one-half) of the interior: at the extremity of this defiladed portion, and (about) parallel to the parapet, raise a parados high enough to in­tercept visual rays directed from points 8 feet above the banquette of the lower parapet to 4 or 8 feet above the height, and from points 8 feet above the banquette of the higher parapet to points 8 feet above the ground in front of the former parapet.

If the site of the intended redoubt be commanded on opposite sides, the work will be defiladed in the manner just described, excepting that, in this case, both the par­apets being commanded, each must be raised high enough to cover the portion of the work between it and the trav­erse or parados from the opposite height.

Or the work may be defiladed thus: the magistral line having been traced, let the engineer place himself at any convenient part of the interior with his eye 8 feet from the ground, and let a man hold up a measuring rod on the tracing line between the engineer and each hill; then a visual ray, from a point estimated to be 8 feet above each bill, will intersect the measuring rods in points through which the crests of the parapets should pass. The place of the engineer is the place of the traverse or parados, the height of which is determined, as before, by visual rays crossing each other from points 4 or 8 feet above the op posite heights to points 8 feet above the banquettes most distant from the heights.

With the aid of a plane table, the plane of site may be readily determined thus: let the upper surface of the table (which should be near the surface of the ground in

 

 

 

 

 

120                                                  FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

rear of the work) be placed in a piano touching the points of command: the intersections of that surface prolonged, with the poles planted at the angles of the work, will determineas many points in the plane of site.

 

 

PROFILING.

 

 

The proper height of parapet for the work having been determined, (by the process of defilading, if necessary,) the next step is to plant pickets on the faces, flanks, and angles as guides to the workmen in giving it the suitable dimensions and form. Thus, to the magistral line of each face and flank, trace on the ground perpendicularly at in­tervals, and on these measure, horizontally, the bases of the slopes composing the profile to be employed. At the points thus set out,* fix poles or laths perpendicularly in the ground, and saw off their tops at the height which the parapet is to have at that particular part; nail laths to the tops of these poles from one to the other across the direc­tion of the intended parapet; and thus there will be ob­tained an outline of the slopes, or a profile of the parapet.

For the profile at an angle, lay a rope on the ground bisecting that angle, and produce it outwards; drive pickets along this rope at the points where it is intersected by the prolongations of lines joining the bases of the profiles already set up perpendicularly to the adjoining faces; these pickets mark the bases of the profiles at the salient; the laths may then be set up as before.

When the salient angle is 600, the breadth of the base of any slope measured on the capital will be equal to twice the breadth of the same slope taken on a line at right angles to the face.

 

*The best method of fixing the perpendicular laths is to drive strong pickets Into the ground at the required points, and to nail to them the laths previously cut of the proper length.

 

 

 

 

      FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                121

 

 

 

DISTRIBUTION OF THE WORKING PARTY.

 

 

Divide the men into 6 equal parts, 3 of which are to be provided with pickaxes and shovels, 2 are to have shovels only, and the remainder are to be furnished with rammers only.

The party is then to be marched to the ground, and the men, having both pickaxes and shovels, (viz, the dig­gers,) are to be stationed 6 * feet apart on the ground where the ditch is to be dug along the berme line, and facing the work.

The excavation of the ditch is now begun, the men first loosening the earth with their pickaxes, and then shovelling it to the place where the parapet is to stand; here the rest of the party are posted, and as the earth is thrown up to them, the men with shovels spread it in layers, while the remainder with their rammers, beat it down to a firm mass; and as the parapet is raised they give it the form indicated by the profiles.

The profiles may be made of 3 inch plank, ripped up into laths three-quarters of an inch thick.

The work may be drained, if requisite, with fascines of stout rods, or with loose stones having brushwood or heather laid over them; these are placed in trenches dug across the ground on which the parapet is to be raised.

In excavating ditches and trenches, the slopes are made after the ditch or trench is finished, the sides being at first left in steps; the crest of the slope is marked out, and then small sections are cut, here and there, according to the proper form of the finished profile: finally, the in-

 

*­The diggers must not be placed nearer to each other than 4 ½ feet; but

if the party is strong, another row of diggers may be employed at the counter­scarp, with their backs to the work; these throw the earth towards the middle of the space marked out for the breadth of the ditch.

 

 

122                                                     FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

termediate earth is cut away between these small sec­tions; the latter answering the purpose of ensuring regu­larityin the excavation of the ditch, as the lath profiles ensure it in the erection of the parapet.

When near the surface, in soil requiring but little the use of the pickaxe, an excavation of 6 cubic yards in a day of 8 hours would be a fair task for a soldier, who, in general, is little accustomed to the use of the pickaxe and shovel.

In calculating the time required to throw up a field work, the following data may be assumed; In light, dry, sandy soil, that can be easily dug without the aid of’ a pickaxe, a man can, in a day of 8 hours, load from 10 to 20 cubic yards of earth on barrows. If a pickaxe be re­quired, two men can do the same quantity of work.

If the whole mass must be first moved with the pick-axe, three or four men should be allowed.

A man can wheel 20 cubic yards of earth per day to a distance of 30 yards on level ground, or 20 yards on a ramp.

Twenty cubic yards of earth will fill 500 wheelbar­rows.

A horse can do as much work as 7 men: he can carry 300 lbs. 20 miles per day, or 200 lbs. 30 miles; he can draw 1,600 lbs. on a plain, and from 1,200 to 1,300 lbs. on irregular ground, when the roads are in good order.

 

 

OBSTACLES.

 

 

Palisades are triangular prisms of wood pointed at the upper end, and placed upright in the ground at 3 or 4inches asunder; they are about 10 feet long, with faces 6 or 8 inches wide, and are sunk 3 or 4 feet in the ground. A trench of that depth is dug, the palisades are placed in

 

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                  123

 

it, and the earth is well rammed about them; they are connected at top (and sometimes at bottom also) by a ribbon of wood, called a lintel, 4 inches wide by 2 ½  thick, nailed to the inside of the palisades about one foot from the points; they ought to stand, at least, 7 feet out of the ground. Rough palisades may be formed, quickly, from trees by cutting them into lengths about 10 feet, then describing triangles, with sides of not less than 6 inches in length on the ends, and sawing them lengthwise through those sides; if the trees are 12 or 14 inches in diameter, six equilateral triangles meeting in the centre, can be described on the ends, and six palisades made of one piece: if the tree is but 6 inches in diameter, then, by sawing it in halves, two palisades can be made of one piece.

Palisades are only used in the ditches, and to close the gorges of field works, and are not, as in permanent works, placed on the banquettes ; when in the ditch, their best position is at the foot of the counterscarp, and slightly inclined towards it ; for, thus placed, they are more se­cure from a direct fire of artillery, and they detain the enemy at the counterscarp under the deadly aim of the garrison; also it makes it difficult for the assailants to cut them down, there being no room between them and the counterscarp to stand and wield the axe.

Fraises are palisades about 11 feet long, placed in a horizontal or in an inclined position; they ought to be sunk about 5feet in the ground, the buried ends being joined by a ribbon in order to render it difficult to pull them out ; the pointed ends ought to he not less than 7 feet from the bottom of the ditch; and when placed on the berme they ought to incline downwards, in order that they may not interrupt the passage of shells when rolled over the parapet. Praises are most advantageously placed

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

124                                                   FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

2 or 3 feet below the edge of the counterscarp, as they are, there, more secure than on the berme, from the direct fire of the enemy, whom they detain under a close fire from the work.

Chevaux-de-frise are beams of wood from 6 to 10 feet long, which are cut in a square or hexagonal form, and have pointed stakes or sword blades inserted into the faces; when several are used, in one length, they are chained together to prevent the enemy from removing them; and they are made of the lengths just mentioned in order that they may be portable.

They are employed as temporary barriers to impede the passage of a breach, the entrance into a work, to block up a street, &e.; they are occasionally placed at the foot of the counterscarp of the ditch, and, also, on the berme; in the latter situation they must be covered from the view and fire of the enemy by a small glacis.

Abatis are large boughs or entire trees laid down in a line, with the butt ends buried 3 or 4 feet in the ground, and the branches turned towards the enemy: to form an efficient obstacle, the branches ought to stand, at least, as high as a man’s breast, the smaller parts being cut off and the larger pointed; the butts should be secured in the ground by beams or trees picketed across them, and they should be covered with earth well rammed; this pre­caution will make it difficult to drag them away. They ought, moreover, to be covered by a glacis, that they may not be seen and breached or destroyed at a distance, by artillery.

A detachment of 90 men can make about 750 feet of abatis in a day.

Some of the trees on the borders of a wood being formed into abatis, may deter an enemy from attempting to penetrate into the wood. A breastwork may be made

 

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                               125

 

of trunks of trees piled one on another to the required height behind the abatis; this is soon done, and it much increases the strength of the obstacle.

Trous de loup are holes dug in the ground in the form of an inverted cone or pyramid, and are made about 6 feet wide and 6 deep: a pointed stake is planted at the bottom to prevent an enemy from making use of them as rifle pits. In order to form an effective obstacle, they should be disposed checker-wise in three rows, with in­tervals of about 10 feet between them; the earth from them should be formed into a glacis, rather than heaped up between them, in the latter case they might be easily filled up.

Trous de loup of even two or three feet deep, may be usefully employed in rendering impassable shallow wet ditches, inundations, and fords ; and, as well as abatis, they are suitable obstacles to the advance of an enemy on the salients of works, on the weak points of lines, or through their intervals ; they may thus compel the en­emy to attack the stronger parts.

The gorges of works may also be closed by abatis and trous de loup, when there are no means of planting pali­sades for that purpose.

A man can make one trou de loup in a day. An Entanglement is formed by cutting half through the stems of small trees, and pulling the upper parts to the ground, to which they are then picketed.

Crows feet are four iron spikes joined together at one end in such a manner, that when thrown on the ground one point will always be uppermost; they may be quickly made by inserting four spikenails into a small block of wood, so as to point in different directions ; they are chiefly employed to obstruct the advance of cavalry.

Pointed-Stakes are frequently fixed in the ground, at

 

 

 

 

 

 

126                                                    FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

any place which the enemy might occupy at the time of an assault; as on the bermes of works, the edges of trous de loup, and in the spaces between them. They must be firmly planted in the ground, and if they are pointed be­fore insertion, two mallets must be used, one of which is provided with a conical hole to receive the point of the stake, while the blows are struck with the other; these pickets may be conveniently formed of the small branches cut from the trees intended for abatis.

Common Fougasses are small mines placed in shafts or pits from 3 to 10 feet deep.

The powder is lodged on one side of the shaft at the bottom, and is fired from a secure spot by means of a powder hose, or fuze, which is brought up one side of the shaft, and carried in a trough (or easing tube) parallel to the surface of the ground; the trough should be 5 or 6 feet below the ground if there is any danger of shells falling on it; if not, 2 feet will be deep enough.

A shell fougass is formed by dividing a box into two parts by a horizontal partition; the shells being loaded, are placed in the upper part, with the fuzes pointing down through holes in the partition, in order that they may be ignited, at the same moment, by the priming; the latter consists of a few pounds of powder placed in the lower compartment.

Shell fougasses are very convenient obstacles to impede the passage of a ditch and the ascent of a breach, ns they can be prepared within the work, and speedily buried at the required spot just before their action is required.

A Stone fougass or rock mortar is thus formed. Excavate a shaft at an inclination of about 450 to the horizon, and about 6 feet deep; at the bottom place a charge of 55lbs. of powder, then a strong shield of wood (at least 6 inches thick) in front of the charge; and over the shield

 

 

 

 

 

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 127

 

throw in 3 or 4 cubic yards of pebbles of not less than half a pound weight ouch; a sufficient body of earth must be heaped vertically above the charge, and retained over the upper part of the shaft (near the edge) by a revetment of’ sods, to ensure its effect taking place in the direction required.

Twelve men can make a stone fougass in three hours, which, being charged as before described, will, when exploded, disperse the materials over a circle of 30 or 40 yards radius, at about (50 yards from the mouth of the shaft.

The usual and most effective position for fougasses is beyond the ditch and over the salients or other weak points of the work; they must be removed in advance of the ditch so far as not to injure the counterscarp by their explosion.

A good method of discharging fougasses at the mo­ment required, is to place a loaded musket with the muz­zle in the priming and a wire attached to the trigger; the wire can be led in any direction, in the same manner as the hose, and being pulled at the proper moment, the explosion will take place.

 

INUNDATIONS.

 

 

It frequently occurs in the field that small streams or rivulets are met with, which of themselves offer no im­pediment to the advance of an enemy, but which, by judicious management, may be made effectually to check his attack on certain points where the water may be col­lected.

An inundation, or collection of water, is produced by forming across a stream one or more dams, which must extend to a certain distance from thence, according to the

 

 

 

 

 

 

128                                                    FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

inclination (or slope) of the ground contiguous to the stream, and to the required breadth of’ the inundation.

A dam may be formed in the following manner: after constructing an embankment of earth on each side of the stream perpendicularly to its length, as far as the bank, stones and gravel should be thrown into the water to di­minish its depth; then two heaps of earth are prepared, one on each bank, and as many workmen being set on as can be employed without impeding each other, the earth from those heaps is thrown into the stream over the stones and gravel as rapidly as possible, until the embankments previously formed are connected together across the stream.

It rarely occurs that sufficient means are to be found in the field to allow of a dam being made more than ten feet high; and supposing this height to be given, the dif­ference of level between any two dams should be five feet, in order that the shallowest part of the inundation may be five feet deep, and, therefore, not fordable.

The distance at which the dams should be placed from one another will depend upon the fall of the bed of the stream, and must be determined by levelling. The thick­ness of the dam at top may be made equal to the depth of the water intended to he retained, but if it is liable to be battered by artillery, it should be ten feet thick at top. The exterior slope of the dam may be left at the natural slope of the earth, while to that opposed to the stream a base of not less than double its height should be given.

A sluice or waste weir should be provided at the height to which it is desired the water should rise; other­wise, the water being allowed to flow over every part, the dam would be destroyed. These openings, or waste weirs, must be revetted with fascines or timber, and ought

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

               FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 129

 

 

to be completed before the dam is carried up to its full height.

Sometimes the inclination of the ground contiguous to the stream prevents the inundation from attaining a depth greater than two or three feet; it may, notwithstanding, be rendered impassable, by digging pits and ditches in different parts before the water is allowed to cover the ground.

The end of the dam on the enemy’s side must be pro­tected by field works to prevent him from destroying it, or using it as a bridge. When no work can be placed immediately to cover the head of the dam, the approaches to it should be defended; or if the opposite bank be within short musket range, the end of the dam may be covered by abatis. The works thrown up to cover the head of a darn are traced precisely on the same principles us those which are to protect a bridge. The best condition, there­fore, when a choice is possible, is, that the inundations should be concave to the enemy.

Small islands may exist in the midst of an inundation, and on these batteries or breastworks for musketry may be advantageously formed, either to protect the dams, or for the general defence of the position.

 

 

TETES DE PONT.

 

 

Tetes de pont are works thrown up to cover a com­munication across a river, to hinder the destruction of the bridge, and to defend it until an army or detachment has crossed over it.

They should be of sufficient strength to be defended until the whole of the troops have crossed and the bridge has been taken up. The works employed for this purpose vary according to the nature of the ground to be occupied,

 

 

130                                                     FIELD F0RTIFICATIONS.

 

the shape and width of the river, the importance of the communication, &c.: they consist of redans, lunettes, hornworks, or portions of any kind of field work.

If the bridge is seen from any point on the bank, the tete de pont should have at least one face, whose fire may sweep that point. Islands should be made to contribute to the defence by works erected on them; these should be breastworks for infantry, if the work is within the range of that arm, or batteries for field guns. Advantage should also be taken of the opposite bank to fortify it in a similar manner. If these measures cannot be taken, auxiliary flanks may be added to the faces of such a work as a redan for the defence of the salients.

A reduit is frequently constructed within a tete de pont, to cover the bridge from the neighboring heights, and also to enable a small party of the troops to keep the enemy in check until the main body has crossed, and the bridge has been taken up; this rear guard then crosses the river in boats or rafts, protected by the fire from the opposite side.

A battery should be constructed so as to enfilade the bridge, and to destroy it, should the enemy force the reduit.

The faces or flanks of a tete de pont should have such directions given to them that their lire may range directly along the banks.

The best position for a (temporary) military bridge and tete is at a re-entering bend of a river; viz., at a part which is concave towards the enemy’s side, because then the bank which is in possession of the force about to lay down the bridge, in part, envelope both that and the tete. Thus, while the bridge is covered from the view of the enemy, breastworks or batteries may be advantageously

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                   131.

 

 

placed to assist in its defence, and at the same time to give an effective cross fire in its front.

When, however, the bridge is to remain a considerable time, these advantages must be given up, and a straight part of the river chosen, because there the current acts directly against the heads of the boats or pontoons, whereas at a bend it acts obliquely against the sides, and thus tends constantly to derange their positions. Again, at a bend tile current is constantly wearing away the concave side, (or bank,) and depositing the earth thus removed at the next convex bend, thus causing a shallow bank to be formed on one side of the river and a deep part at the opposite side; consequently at every fall of the water in such a place, one end of the bridge is left aground on the shallow part, while the other end descends with the water, and times the bridge is in danger of being broken.

It is evident that the bed of a river will be less irregu­lar, and that fords will be most usually found where the course is straight: fords are, however, occasionally found at the bends of’ a river in directions obliquely across, from one convex part to the next on the opposite side.

A ford should not be more than four feet deep for cavalry, three feet for infantry, and two feet four inches for artillery.

 

LINES,

 

 

Lines are a series of works and trenches, or of inde­pendent works, arranged so as to defend each other, and the ground in front of and between them.

Lines are used to cover the front of a position, or to connect important redoubts or forts together.

Lines are of two kinds, such as are continuous, and such as have intervals between the works.

 

 

 

 

132                                                       FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

The former are principally applicable to situations where it is proposed to act on the defensive only, and where they are of such limited extent that the whole line of parapet can be occupied with troops exclusive of the reserves;as, for instance, to close a pass between scarped mountains, or on the sea shore, or on the banks of large rivers; thus resting on natural obstacles, which will pre­vent their flanks being turned. They are often introduced as portions of an extended line with intervals.

Extensive continued lines can make but slight resist­ance, while the labor necessarily expended in executing them is considerable; and as the enemy may menace several points at once, it follows that nearly as many troops would be required for the defence as are employed in the attack, in which case the first principle of fortification is violated. Even if the defenders have a sufficient num­ber of disposable troops, they act, when within lines, under a disadvantage, for they must watch and follow every movement of the enemy, so as to be equally pre­pared to resist a false and a real attack. It has often happened that while the defenders within lines were con­centrating their forces to oppose a false attack, the enemy has penetrated at a point where he was not expected; and a continued line once entered may generally be deemed lost.

Continuous lines of redans connected by curtains are constructed in three ways: in the first, as described by Vauban, the salients of the redans are at 240 yards asun­der, and consequently the musketry fire of one redan does not, effectively, defend the salient of the next. To remedy this defect, it was subsequently recommended that the salients of the redans should be brought within musket range of each other, or within 160 yards.

In both of these constructions the flanking angles

 

 

 

 

 

 

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 133

 

formed by the faces of the redans and the curtains joining them much exceed 1050, and consequently the flanking defence is very imperfect.

In the third construction the salients are removed to 240 yards from each other, (the original distance,) but the curtain is broken into two parts, forming a salient angle, and thus the re-entering or flanking angles are reduced to hut little more than 900, by which means the flanking de­fence is greatly improved.

This tracing is, however, still defective, inasmuch as it presents double the number of salients to the enemy’s attacks, and the branches of the broken curtains are ex­posed to he enfiladed, which is not the case in Vauban’s construction.

Lines of tenailles consist of parapets forming a series of salient and re-entering angles, and are, in fact, like the improved redan lines, except that, in this tracing, the re­dans are all of the same size, and have obtuse angles.

They are traced by setting off distances of about 200 yards along the front of the intended lines, to mark the position of the salient angles; these intervals are then bisected, and perpendiculars drawn towards the interior to give the places of the re-entering angles. The perpen­diculars should not exceed haIf the distance between the salients, otherwise the re-entering angles would be less than right angles.

Cremailere lines are composed of alternate short and long faces at right angles (or nearly so) to each other the short faces, called crotchets, are made about 30 yards long, and the long faces, called branches, about 100 yards long.

These lines possess the following advantages

1st. The branches are but little exposed to be enfiladed, owing to the small projection of the salients.

 

 

 

 

 

 

134                                                    FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

2dIy. Each branch is defended not only by the fire of the adjoining crotchet, but by several others.

3dly. Their outline is very easily adapted to all varieties of ground; and on slopes, in particular, they are very advantageous, because a small additional height given to the crotchets will defilade a long extent of branch from the fire of an enemy on the height.

Their defects are

1st. The crotchets being short, very little of the ditch of each is defended by the adjacent branch.

2dly. A battery which can enfilade one branch is equally able to enfilade several.

Cremaillere lines may be much strengthened by plac­ing along their front bastions or double redans, at intervals varying from 690 to 800 yards, in order that a cross fire of artillery may be brought from them in front of the other pads of the line.

The crotchets should face towards the bastions, or redans, in order that the fire from the crotchets may defend the salients of those works, and that the branches may be defiladed by being directed on the bastions or double redans. When the line crosses a valley, the branches may be most effectually defiladed by giving the whole a bend concave towards the exterior, and placing the bas­tions, or redans, on the high ground; these works will thus form the more advanced parts of the line.

The flanks of the bastions must be connected with the next crotchets on both sides by broken curtains, taking care that the re-entering angles are not less than right angles.

Bastioned lines are made precisely in the manner al. ready pointed out for the fronts of bastioned forts; such lines may be strengthened by lunettes, constructed at musket-shot distances in their front, and having their faces

 

 

 

 

 

               FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                135

 

 

directed upon those of the bastions, in order that the ditches of the lunettes, and the ground in front of them, may be defended by those faces.

The flanks of the Iunettes give a direct and close fire in front of the salients of the bastions ; but care must be taken in their construction that they do not fire into each other ; on this account, when the fronts are in one straight line, it is usual either to suppress the flanks of the lunettes, or to place a lunette on every alternate front only.

The communication from the lines to the gorge of each lunette is by a caponniere, which is, generally, made broadest at the inner end, in order to enable the garrison to meet the enemy on a superior front, should he succeed in getting into it; its parapet is made only 3 feet above the ground that it may not mask the fire of the lines, and consequently its interior must be sunk 4 or 5 feet to afford the requisite cover ; its breadth must be sufficient to allow room for a banquette. A traverse is placed at its inner extremity, and, perhaps, (according to the nature of the ground and the length of the passage,) at intervals along the passage.

Sometimes the line changes its direction ; in such cases, when the change causes the parts of the line to form with each other a re-entering angle, the latter is one of the strongest parts of the line.

 

 

LINES WITH INTERVALS, OR BROKEN LINES.

 

 

Broken lines should always, when practicable, be disposed in a double row, and in such a manner that the inner works may flank the outer ; the advantages possessed by broken lines are

1st. With the same extent as continuous lines, they

 

 

 

136                                                     FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

require less labor in the construction, and fewer troops to occupy them, consequently large reserves may be formed.

2dly. The defenders may advance in force and in a regular formation through the intervals, and attack the enemy, should he have been thrown into confusion.

3dly. They oblige the enemy to overpower each sep­arate work before he can become possessed of the whole; whereas if a continuous line be forced in one part, it is generally lost to the defenders.

4thly. If the enemy has gained one work he will then be exposed to the flanking fire of the adjacent works, and to a fire from the works in the second line.

To profit fully by this advantage, when the front line consists of closed works, their rear faces ought to be of slight construction, that the artillery of the second line may easily demolish those faces, if the enemy should gain possession of the works.

When there are two lines of works, the heaviest ar­tillery should be placed in the inner line, or else the en­emy, obtaining possession of the exterior line, would turn the guns against the other, and have a superiority over the defenders.

When lines are on sloping ground descending towards the front, the slope should, if possible, be cut very steep, so as to form an escarpment before the works.

A single row of redans or redoubts is comparatively weak, for the fire from them crosses at a distance in front of the intervals, and but feebly defends the salients. Lu­nettes are better in such a situation on account of the fire of the flanks, which may be brought to cross the capitals close to the salient angles.

The intervals between the works which form a broken line should not exceed 160 yards, in order that they may be defended by an effective cross fire from those works.

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                137

 

The different works should occupy the most prominent and the highest ground; also the flanking parts ought to be perpendicular to their lines of defence.

The intervals between the works may be strengthened by artificial obstacles, or by a trench, for troops, with a rough parapet, (like the first parallel in a siege,) having a broad interior slope to enable the men to advance over it when occasion requires.

 

 

DEFENCE OF FIELD WORKS.

 

 

A spot selected for a military post should not be com­manded, especially on the flank or in the rear, within the ordinary range of a field piece. There should be plenty of materials on the spot to aid in strengthening the works, or in forming obstructions in front of them. The soil should be of a nature to be easily worked, and the position should be difficult of access ; it should, however, offer the means of retreating in security, and with facility.

The highest ground of a position should be occupied by the salients of works, for then the adjoining faces will be, in some measure, secured from enfilade fire; it follows that the re-entering angles should be placed in the lowest spots.

It is very essential to create obstructions within short range of musketry in front of all works of a temporary nature, with a view of breaking the order of the assailants, and detaining them under a close and severe fire, if they persist in forcing their way through.

In fact, all the movements of an enemy, whether to the front, to the right or left, should be as much cramped and impeded as possible; it is important to break his order and put him into confusion when under fire, for he

 

 

 

 

 

138                                                     FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

can seldom re-form under such circumstances; and if he attacks in disorder, the chances are against his success.

To save time in making palisades or stockade work, the whole quantity ought to be divided into distinct por­tions, say 10 or 12 feet in length, to one carpenter and two laborers; and to prevent confusion in obtaining ma­terials for constructing obstacles, it is well to divide the men into parties of 8 or 10 each, prescribing to each party the nature of the materials required, the place where they are to be obtained, and the spot at which they are to be deposited.

The materials are obtained by felling trees, unroofing houses, taking up floors, and the like,

The guns of a work should not, generally, reply to the cannonade which precedes an assault, but should be placed behind traverses, or other places of shelter previously prepared for them; they should only fire at the enemy’s artillery,while the latter is changing its position.

Round shot or shells are fired against guns; grape, canister, spherical case, and rockets against troops.

As soon as the enemy’s light troops advance, the parapets are to be manned; sand-bags previously filled are placed along the parapet, leaving loopholes between them; they are musket-shot proof; and give the men the necessary confidence to enable them to take a steady aim. One rank of men is sufficient on the ban­quette, others being placed behind them to load. A reserve is to be stationed under cover, who fall upon the assailants with the bayonet, should they succeed in getting into the work. For a good defence there ought to be a file per yard to man the parapet, with a reserve of one-fourth or one-sixth of the whole, in addition.

As soon as the assaulting columns begin to mask the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

               FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                               139

 

 

fire of their own artillery, the guns of’ the work will be brought up, and open their fire on them.

A sortie (very rarely) may be made, should the en­emy be thrown into disorder; but this step, requires great caution, for should the sortie be repelled, the enemy may enter the work with the retiring troops.

Fougasses, having been previously prepared, will be fired the instant the enemy is above them, by means of’ a piece of safety fuze,or a musket with its muzzle in the powder and a wire to the trigger.

If the assailants at length descend into the ditch, shells, grenades, and every sort of missile are to be thrown upon them. The shells are rolled down by being placed, in troughs laid on the superior slope of the parapet.

If the enemy has to cross a river before he arrives at the work, the fords may be rendered impassable for ar­tillery and cavalry, by digging pits, planting stakes, throw­ing in felled trees and harrows, or by driving wagons or carts full of’ stones into the middle, and taking off the wheels.

Should the ford be beyond musket range from the work, a parapet may be raised opposite to it, at such a distance from it as to permit the defenders to issue forth and charge the party crossing it, at the moment they land in disorder on the bank.

To prevent surprise, outposts are stationed round the work at night, and heaps of dried brushwood, or tarred fascines, should be placed along the post at intervals; at the approach of the enemy, the outposts retire into the work, having set fire to the piles of brushwood; this will, in a great measure, prevent an enemy from concealing himself near the work.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

140                                                    FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

 

 

LOOPHOLING WALLS.

 

Walls are made available for the purposes of defence by loopholing them; if a ditch cannot, for want of time, be dug at the foot of the wall outside, the loopholes ought to be, at least, 7 feet above the ground, to prevent the assailants from making use of them; in the former case a temporary stage might be made of casks, ladders, &e., within 4 feet or 4 feet 6 inches of the loopholes, to enable the men to fire through them.

The quickest way of loopholing a wall is to break it down from the top in the form of narrow fissures about 3 feet asunder; but if the wall is very low, or there is not time to make loopholes, a piece of timber, or the trunk of a tree, supported on the top of it by a couple of stones, would be a ready expedient, and men could fire from the opening under it; or sand-bags, or large stones or sods, might be placed on the wall at intervals. The loopholes made in walls or buildings can seldom be of any regular form ; the width outside should not exceed 3 inches, but inside it may be equal to the thickness of the wall. The best tools (of such as are usually found about buildings) to break loopholes through a wall, arc crow­bars, pickaxes, and large hammers.

Barricades for roads and streets are made, if time per­mits, by sinking a ditch 7 or 8 feet deep, and forming the earth into a breastwork, adding palisades, &c.; but if time presses, casks, boxes, or cart bodies filled with earth, stones, manure, or cinders, sacks of flour, bales of mer­chandise, and the like, must be arranged across; paving stones may be taken up and disposed in a similar manner.

The mass should be raised 6 or 7 feet high, and a banquette formed for firing over it; the neighboring houses

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                141

 

should also be loopholed, so as to give a good flanking fire over the ground in front of the barricade, and stones may he collected to throw down on the assailants from the contiguous houses.

 

FORTIFYING HOUSES.

 

The great art of converting buildings, and the out-houses and walls that usually surround them, into defen­sible posts, consists in selecting from the mass of objects at hand such as will answer the purpose, and in sacrificing every thing else; making use of the materials to strengthen the part which is to be fortified.

The building chosen should possess some of, or all the following requisites

1st. It should command all that surrounds it.

2dly. It should be substantial, (not thatched,) and of a nature to furnish materials useful for placing it in a state of defence.

3dIy. It should be of an extent not too great for the number of the defenders, and should only require for the completion of the proposed object the time and means which can be spared.

4thly. It should have projections flanking the walls and angles.

5thly. It should be difficult of access on the side ex­posed to attack, and yet have a safe retreat for the defenders; and, of course, it must be in such a position as to answer the purpose for which the detachment is posted.

As a rough guide to judge of the third requisite, there ought to be a man for every 4 feet of wall round the in­terior of the lower story, one man to 6 feet for the second story, one to 8 feet for an attic, with a reserve of about one-sixth of the whole.

 

 

 

 

 

142                                                    FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

Should there exist any doubt about having sufficient time to execute all that might be wished, it would be neecessary to decide on the best points to be secured, in order to repel an immediate attack; in such a case it might be well to employ as many men as could work without hin­dering each other by being too crowded, to collect mate­rials, and barricade the doors and windows on the ground floor, to make loopholes in them, and to level any ob­struction outside that would give cover to the enemy, or facilitate the attack; to sink ditches opposite the doors on the outside, and arrange loopholes in the windows of the upper story; to make loopholes through the walls generally, attending first to the most exposed parts, and to break communications through all the party walls and partitions; to place abatis or any feasible obstruction on the outside, and to improve the defence of the post by the construction of tambours; to place outbuildings and garden walls in a state of defence, and establish communi­cations between them; to make arrangements (in the lower story particularly) for defending one room after another, so that a partial possession only could be ob­tained on a sudden attack being made.

These different works should be undertaken in the order of their relative importance, according to circum­stances; and after securing the immediate object for which they were designed, they might remain to be improved on, if an opportunity should offer.

Houses are fortified by piercing loopholes through the walls, and if the walls are high, two, or even three rows of loopholes may be made, and a temporary scaf­folding of furniture, casks, &e., erected for firing from the upper ones: one row may be made close to the ground, with pits dug in the rear, or the floor may be cut through, if there is a basement, for the convenience of making use

 

 

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                              143

 

ofthem. The loopholes may have the dimensions before described, and they ought not to be made at a less distance than three feet from each other, lest the wall should be too much weakened, or the defenders inconveniently crowded.

The staircases are to be cut away, the communication being kept up by ladders; and the floors, as well as the partition walls, should be loopholed.

Thatched roofs and all combustible materials are to be removed, and barrels of water should be placed in every room in readiness to extinguish fire.’

A communication ought to be opened on the side fur­thest from the enemy, through which ammunition and reinforcements may enter.

The door or barrier closing this communication may be made musket-proof by nailing strong planks to it, and if there is a basement to the house, the floor should be cut awny within the door, so as to form a sort of ditch.

All the doors and windows are to be barricaded and loopholed. The best barricade for a door is made by strong palisades, which are secured to a thick cross beam let into the wall on each side; a bank of earth may also be formed on the exterior.

A flanking defence can always be obtained by con­structing a tambour in front of a side, or at the angles of a house.

All enclosures which may afford the enemy cover must be removed, if not included in the defence.

If artillery is likely to be employed against the house, it will be necessary, unless the walls are very strong, to support the timbers of the roof by means of props.

If there is time, the house may be formed into a blockhouse by pulling down the upper stories, and laying

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

144                                                     FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.

 

 

the materals over the lower rooms to make the covering shell-proof.

A ditch may he dug on the outside of’ the house, and the earth placed against the walls: some protection may be obtained for the doors, by placing strong beams against the walls on the outside in an inclined position, and heaping earth or rubbish over them.

 

 

INTRENCHING A VILLAGE.

 

 

In intrenching a village, the buildings, walls, and hedges on its circuit are to be considered as part of its enclosure, and are to be made fit for the purposes of de­fence; all the intervals between them are to be occupied by breastworks or palisades, and strengthened by abatis.

The streets are to be barricaded at intervals with carts or wagons having one or two wheels taken off with barrels of earth, bales of merchandise, &c. A passage should be made through the adjoining houses, which should be loop-holed, and care must be taken that the barricade be not turned by an enemy passing down the neighboring streets.

Some strong building, such as a church, court-house, or jail, should be selected, and fortified with particular care, to serve as a citadel or reduit, to which the defenders may retire when driven in from the exterior part of the village.

Advantage must be taken of any walls or outbuildings surrounding whatever has been selected as the reduit or keep; and they should be converted into outworks for strengthening it as an independent post. Should the village be of too great an extent for the force thrown into it, a portion of it only might be strengthened, and the re­mainder separated or destroyed; or the defence might be confined to some separate building.

 

 

 

          FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.                                                 145

 

The roads by which an enemy would advance should be cut up, and obstructed with felled trees, ploughs, har­rows, &c.; bridges should he broken, and the passage disputed under cover of’ some simple field work placed favorably to command the road.

The resolute defence of villages situated on the front of an army has often decided the fate of a battle; in this position, they may be regarded as bastions connected by movable curtains.

 

 

ATTACK ON FIELD WORKS.

 

 

The attack on field works may be executed by sur­prise, or by open force; the former can only take place when the advance of the assailants is concealed by fog or darkness, or by the nature of the ground, as in mountain­ous countries.

In the attack of field works by open force, it is ad­visable to advance against several points at the same mo­ment, when circumstances permit ; of these some may be false attacks, and may be converted into real ones if the enemy appears weak or hesitating on the points threat­ened. One attack ought, generally, to be directed upon the rear of the work, (if open at the gorge,) which will always lessen the confidence of the defenders.

As many assaulting columns should be formed as there are points to be attacked, and before the works are stormed, pits and trenches should (when time permits, and there is no natural cover for skirmishers) be dug to conceal riflemen these pits are about four feet wide, and, with the excavated earth raised before them, four feet in depth, in order that they may serve to cover a file of men to that height.

 

 

 

 

 

148                                                     FIELD F0RTIFICATI0NS.

 

 

should be made on different parts of the building, to distract the attention of the defenders; in the mean time, and for the same purpose, parties of men keep up a fire on any points where there is a chance of disabling them. Attempts may also be made to effect an entrance through the roof, by means of ladders.

If the assailants have neither powder nor crowbars for forcing doors, a heavy beam or tree may, if at hand, be used as a battering ram; a fire of straw or brushwood may be made near the walls further to distract and alarm the defenders, and to cover the operations of the assailants.

 

 

ATTACKING BARRICADES.

 

 

Artillery will soon clear a passage through ordinary barricades; if not, the assaulting party must endeavor to turn the barricade, either by passing down some other street, or by forcing a passage from one house to another, until they arrive in rear of it: a few loaded muskets ap­plied to the locks and bolts of the strongest door will force it open, and the partition walls may be destroyed by bags of powder, &c. After having taken possession of a house, troops must be left in it for the purpose of’ firing from it upon the barricade.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER X.

 

ARTILLERY.

 

THE pieces of artillery in ordinary use are: guns, howitzers, and mortars. They are made either of iron or brass, (gun metal.)

Brass guns are made of a metal composed of 8 parts of tin to 100 of copper, and cost about $900 per ton; iron guns cost $100 per ton.

Brass, guns are used for field batteries, as they can be made with a less quantity of metal than iron guns of the same calibre, without danger of bursting. Therefore, though brass is heavier than iron, guns of the former metal are lighter than those of the latter. Brass guns are, however, soon rendered unserviceable by repeated and quick firing.

Iron guns are better adapted for the attack or defence of fortresses, and for service on board of ship, being less expensive than those of brass, and better able to sustain long continued and rapid firing.

At the siege of St. Sebastian, each piece fired 350 rounds in 15 ½ hours without becoming unserviceable: brass guns could not have fired 120 rounds in the same time, without drooping at the muzzle and running at the vent so much as to become useless.

The length of a gun is measured from the rear of the base or breech-ring to the face of the muzzle.

 

 

 

150                                                                ARTILLERY.

 

 

The CALIBRE is the diameter of the bore.

The DISPART is the excess of half the diameter of the base ring (or thickest part of the gun) above half the di­ameter of the muzzle. Guns are made thicker at the breech than at the muzzle, the better to resist the expan­sive force of the powder.

The TRUNNIONs are projections or arms one on each side of the gun, by which it is secured and supported in the carriage.

The WINDAGE is the excess of the diameter of the bore over the diameter of the shot, and is, in field guns, about 1/40  the diameter of the shot; in iron guns it is about 1/6  inch.*

Guns are named according to the number of pounds contained in the round shot they carry; thus a 6-pounder carries a 6 lb. shot; a 12-pounder carries a 12 lb. shot, etc.

The service charge of powder for battering is one-third of the weight of the shot.

The charge for field guns is from 1/6 to ¼  of the weight of the shot, as a greater charge is found to injure the car­riages without producing an equivalent effect.

For rieochet firing, the charge varies from 1/18 to 1/36 the weight of the shot; and the elevation of the gun from 50 to 90.

To increase the range of the gun, an increase of eleva­tion above a horizontal line must be given to the axis of the gun.

In pointing a gun, the line of’ direction is given from the trail, and the elevation from the breech.

 

*12, 9,and 8 pounders have a 1/10 inch windage; a 8 pounder has 9/100 inch; 32 pounder from 1/6 inch to 1/8 inch, according to the length; 24 pounder about 1/6inch; 18 pounder about 1/7  inch. Carronades have a windage of 1/64 the diameter of the shot.

 

 

 

 

 

 

          ARTILLERY.                                                          151

 

Point-blank position of the gun denotes that the piece is laid, directly, at the object without elevation: to effect this, the lowest notch on the side of the base ring, the notch on the side of the muzzle, and the object to be fired at, are brought into one line; the two notches are in a plane passing through the axis of the bore, and that plane may be parallel or oblique to the horizon.

Point-blank range is the distance from themuzzle of the gun to the first point at which the shot strikes the ground ; it being supposed that the latter is parallel to the axis of the bore.

If the gun is pointed at an object, by looking along the upper surface of it, (for which purpose there is a notch behind the vent, and one on the top of the muzzle,) it is said to be laid by the line of metal, and it gives the gun an elevation of about one degree; the breech being wider than the muzzle.

The upper right hand quadrant of the base ring has 12 quarter degrees (called quarter sights) notched on it; by bringing the object, the notch on the side of the muzzle, and any quarter sight into one line, a corresponding ele­vation or depression is given to the gun.

The tangent-scale is raised from a groove behind the vent, and can be fixed at any point of its length by a screw; it is divided into quarter degrees from one degree upwards: by means of this scale the requisite elevation, as far as 6 or 8 degrees, may be given with great accu­racy, the object being seen in a line with the top of the tangent-scale, and the notch on the top of the muzzle.

The point-blank range of Iight (brass) 12, 6, and 3- pounders, is 200 yards; medium 12 and 9-pounders and heavy 6-pounders, 300 yards ; iron (long) 24-pounders, 360 yards.

Every quarter of a degree of elevation increases the

 

 

 

 

 

152                                                                ARTILLERY.

 

 

range of each class by 100 yards until there are attained, respectively, the ranges of 600, 700, and 1200 yards, after which each quarter of’ a degree increases the range by a less amount than 100 yards.

Howitzers * are a short description of ordnance with chambers, and are used, principally, for projecting shells horizontally or nearly so.

Their principal advantages are, that they can be more easily loaded, and are considerably lighter, in proportion to their calibre than guns; they may, also, be used as mortars: they have no dispart, the diameter of the base ring and swell of the muzzle being equal, or the difference being made up by a patch on the muzzle.

Howitzers are intended for enfilade and ricochet firing, to reach troops behind heights and parapets, and to breach earthen works by firing shell into them: for these pur­poses heavy charges are not necessary, although the bores may be large; the chamber is formed so as to confine the powder as much as possible, and so that the shell may rest on its mouth.

Mortars differ from guns in the construction of their bore, their chamber being in the shape of a frustum of a cone, by which means the powder is confined, arid the shell fits close to the sides; they are also much shorter and thicker than guns : they have trunnions at the ex­tremity of the breech, and are usually placed on their beds so as to project shells, carcasses, or fire balls at an angle of 450, the range being increased by augmenting the charge of powder.

The shells discharged from mortars describe a high curve in their flight, and fall with their full weight almost vertically upon the object to be struck; they thus frac­-

 

The charges for certain howitzers are as follows:—1O inch, 7 lbs.; 8-Inch,

4 lbs.; 5½ inch, (24-pounder,) 2 to 2 ½ lbs.; 42/5 inch, (I2 ½ pounder,) ¼ to ½  lb.

 

 

               

ARTILLERY.                                                           163

 

ture the strongest buildings, and bursting at the same time, they set fire to every thing combustible about them.

Their splinters are also very destructive, and fly in all directions, sometimes as far as 400 yards. As mor­tars fire over the parapet, and not through embrasures, it is necessary that they should be placed at a distance of 12 feet behind the crest of the parapet, supposing it to be of the ordinary height.

Rockets are cylindrical cases of pasteboard * or iron, attached to one end of a rod of wood, and containing a composition, which being ignited, they are projected through the air by a force arising fromthe combustion.

Military rockets terminate either in a cone or a par­abolid, and may serve either as shells or carcasses: their weight is from 3 to 32 lbs. They are, in general, fired from tubes, and the proper elevation is about a degree for each hundred yards in the intended range. Fired against troops they create much disorder, and falling on buildings, they destroy them or set them on fire.

The  length of the rod is about 60 diameters of the rocket and the composition with which the cylinder is filled consists generally of saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal or gunpowder. The composition is rammed into the case, but a void space is left about the axis, in order that a considerable surface may be at once in a state of combus­tion. At the choke or neck of the rocket there are several apertures, at one of which the fire is communicated to the composition.

The cause of the rocket’s motion is, the excess of the pressure produced by the burning material at the head of the rocket above the pressure at the neck, when part of

 

* The former are for signals, and the latter are for military service.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

154                                                             ARTILLERY.

 

the flame escapes through the apertures; the stick serves to guide the rocket in its flight.

Shells are hollow shot with a hole to receive the fuse; they are discharged, usually, from mortars and howitzers, and are charged with a quantity of powder sufficient to burst them when at the end of their range; the fuze being cut of such a length that the charge may be ignited at the proper moment.

To breach earthen works, the shells are fired horizon­tally, from howitzers, with reduced charges, that the fuze may not be extinguished before igniting the powder in the shell: this powder is a bursting charge.

Carcasses are shells with three fuze holes; they are filled with a peculiar composition, which flames out of the holes with great power and fury for about ten minutes: they are thrown from mortars, howitzers, and guns, to set fire to buildings, and sometimes to serve as light balls.

Shrapnell shells, or spherical-case shot, are shells filled with musket balls, having a bursting charge of powder mixed with them. They are discharged from guns and howitzers, and have a fuze like that of a common shell, but shorter, in order that the shell may burst in the air before the completion of its range; in this manner mus­ket balls and the splinters of the shell can be poured into a column of troops at 1,200 yards distance.

Common case, or canister shot, are cylindrical tin canisters with wooden or iron bottoms, containing from 12 to 70 shot, which vary in weight from 1 ½ oz. to 8 oz. each, according to the calibre of the gun. As they burst nearly at the mouth of the gun, their effect cannot be de­pended on beyond 200 yards, although they are used at a greater distance.

Grape shot are of two patterns; either the balls are

 

 

 

 

 

 

          ARTILLERY.                                                         155

 

quilted round an iron pin with a circular plate at the bottom, or pin runs through a succession of plates, between every two of which is a tier of balls ; in the latter case they are also called “tier shot.”

ln the first pattern, the shot soon corrode the canvas quilting, therefore the second is preferred: there are 9 shot in each round, each shot varying in weight from 8 oz. to 4 lbs. according to the calibre of the gun; the most effective range is about 200 yards.

Hand grenades are shells of about 1 lb. 13 oz. weight, with a fuze and bursting charge ; they can be thrown, by the hand, about 25 or 30 yards; they are useful for the defence of breaches and unflanked works.

Gunpowder is composed of 75parts saltpetre, 15charcoal, and 10 sulphur in every hundred parts: a cubic foot of it weighs about 55lbs.

A shell fuzeis a funnel shaped tube of well seasoned beech, filled with a composition of saltpetre, sulphur, and mealed gunpowder.

Portfire is a composition of saltpetre, charcoal, and sulphur, pressed closely into a cylinder of white brown paper; they are made in lengths of 16 inches, and are used to discharge guns, to ignite bags of powder, &c.

Port fire and shell fuzes burn at the rate of one inch in five seconds Bickford’s fuze (which will burn under water) burns 6 inches in 5 seconds, or 2 yards in a minute.

 

To fire shot or shells ~ ricochet., or in such a manner that they make several bounds during their course, it is necessary to give the gun or howitzer a charge, and an elevation depending on the extent of the range required. III enfilading a work ricochet, the gun should be placed nearly in the direction of the interior slope of the parapet

 

 

 

 

 

 

156                                                             ARTILLERY.

 

 

produced; and its elevation should be such that the shot may just clear the crest of the parapet in front.

Ricochet firing against guns in a work, is useless if carried on at a greater distance than 050 yards; the best range is about 400 yards.

Round shot are sometimes fired red hot from heavy guns, to set on fire buildings, blockhouses, shipping, and any defences in the construction of which timber has been employed.

It requires about three-quarters of an hour to heat a 24 pound shot when the furnace has been previously pre pared; double that time if not. In loading, a tight dry wad is placed over the powder, and afterwards a wet wad, first soaked, and then well wrung; next, the gun being slightly elevated, the shot is brought up, by means of an instrument called the carrier, and rolled home; if it is required to depress the gun, another wet wad must be placed over the shot.

A gun platform is a flooring of wood or stone, to pre­vent the wheels or trucks of a gun carriage from sinking into the ground: the garrison and siege platforms are 10 feet wide at the head, 15 feet long, and 14 feet wide at the splay or tail.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER XI.

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

1.   FOR instruction in the manual of light artillery, the piece selected is the light 12-pdr. howitzer, used for mountain service, on account of its simplicity, and as em­bracing all the principles required for serving a light field piece. It is generally transported by mules. The piece and the shafts may be packed upon one mule, the carriage upon another, and the ammunition chest upon a third. The carriage is adapted for draught.

In case the pieces are served by a fully organized company, a jumper or short light pole, with a cross-piece of iron at the end, is substituted for the shafts. A rope, attached to the axle-tree and running through rings in the cross-piece, enables the detachments to draw the pieces. In coming into battery, the rope is detached and held in a coil ready for use.

2.   The mule that draws the piece, or carries it when packed, is called the shaft mule; the mule that carries the carriage, when packed, the carriage mule; and the mule on which the ammunition chests are packed, the am­munition mule.

3.   The piece is in battery when the shafts are detached and it is in a proper position to be fired. The front in this case is the direction towards which the muzzle points.

 

 

 

 

158                                               MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

 

The front, when the shafts are attached, is the direction towards which the shafts point. The right of the piece, in both eases, is the right of the cannoneer when facing to the front.

The position of the mules, when the piece is in bat­tery, is as follows:

The ammunition mule fifteen yards in rear of the piece, the shaft mule two yards in rear of the ammunition mule, and the carriage mule two yards in rear of the shaft mule, all facing towards the piece.

4.   In the order of march, with the howitzer mounted on its carriage, the shaft mule is hitched in, and the car­riage and, ammunition mules follow; the first two yards from the piece, and the second two yards from the (first.

5.   In the order of march, with the piece and carriage packed upon the mules, the shaft mule leads, and the other two follow; the distance between each being two yards.

 

FORMING THE DETACHMENT.

 

 

6. Six men are required for the service of the piece. They are formed in two ranks, and told off from the right by the chief of piece; Nos. 1 and 2 being on the right, No. 3 and the gunner being in the centre, and Nos. 4 and 5on their left; the even numbers and the gunner being in the front, and the odd numbers in the rear rank.

The detachment is marched to the piece, and posted as follows:

 

POSTS OF THE DETACHMENT.

 

 

7. In battery. Nos. 1 and 2 about one yard outside of the wheels, and in line with the axle-tree, No. 1 being on the right, and No. 2 on the left; the gunner at the

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                           159

 

 

end of the trail; No. 3 opposite the knob of the cascable, covering No. 1; No. 4 on the right, and No. 5 on the left of the ammunition mule; all facing to the front. The chief of piece is opposite to the trail, outside of and near the left cannoneers.

8.   In battery, without mules. Nos. 4 and 5 are on the right and left of the ammunition chests, facing to the front.

9.   In the order of march, shaft mules hitched in. Nos. 1 and 2 opposite to the muzzle; the gunner and No. 3 opposite to the trail; and Nos. 4 and 5 opposite to the saddle of the ammunition mule; the gunner and even numbers on the right, and the odd numbers on the left; all facing to the front, and covering each other in lines one yard from the wheels. The chief of piece is on the left of the driver of the shaft mule.

10.In the order of march, mules packed. Nos. 1 and 2 at the shaft mule; the gunner and No. 3 at the car­riage mule; and Nos. 4 and 5 at the ammunition mule; the gunner and even numbers on the right, and odd num­bers on the left; all opposite to the saddles, one yard from the mules, and facing to the front. The chief of piece is on the left of the driver of the shaft mule.

11.There is one driver to each mule. He is on the left of the mule, and holds the reins with the right hand, six inches from the mouth, the hand high and firm.

 

 

SERVICE OF THE PIECE.

 

 

12.The piece is in battery, the men at their posts. (No. 7.)

The shafts are placed on the, ground, one yard and a half from the line of the right wheel, and parallel to it,

 

 

 

 

160                                               MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

 

the cross-bar opposite to the trail, the shafts pointing to the rear.

The chests, when the ammunition mule is absent, are on the ground, fifteen yards in rear of the trail, the sides parallel to the axis of the piece, backs together, the turn­buckles outside.

13. At the command TAKE EQUIPMENTS, the gunner distributes the equipments: No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, takes out the sponge. The gunner equips him­self with the belt containing the hausse and priming wire, and with the knee-guard and the finger-stall, wearing the last on the second finger of the left hand. No. 3 wears the tube pouch containing friction tubes and the lanyard. Nos. 1 and 2 wear bricoles hung from the left shoulder to the right side. Nos. 2 and 5wear haversacks hung from the right shoulder to the left side.

 

 

THE COMMANDS.

 

 

14. In loading by detail, the instructor gives all the commands.

The commands are: Load by detail, LOAD, 2, 3, 4; SPONGE, 2, 3, 4; RAM, 2, 3; READY; FIRE, and CEASE FIRING.

When the service of the piece is not executed by de­tail, the commands of the instructor are, either LOAD, COMMENCE FIRING, and CEASE FIRING; or, COMMENCE FIRING and CEASE FIRING. After the command COMMENCE FIRING, the action is continued without further commands from the instructor until the command CEASE FIRING.

The last command is repeated by the chief of piece and the gunner.

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                          161

 

 

 

DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS.

 

 

15.Duties of the Gunner.—In action, the gunner gives or repeats the commands of execution. At the command or signal to commence firing, he gives the word LOAD; plants the left foot opposite to the knob of the cascable; places the right knee upon the ground near, and on the left of the trail; places the hausse, when it is used; seizes the lunette with the right hand, to give the direction, and at the same time tends vent with the second finger of the left hand, the thumb on the base of the breech.

As soon as the piece is loaded and aimed, he removes the hausse; then rising pricks the cartridge; gives the word READY, and stepping clear of the wheel to the side whence he can best observe the effect of the shot, gives the command, FIRE, he continues the action in the same manner, without farther commands from the instructor, until the firing is ordered to cease.

When the instructor, instead of giving the command COMMENCE FIRING, gives that of LOAD, the gunner repeats it, and performs the, same duties as just described, except that he does not command FIRE, until the firing is ordered to commence.

When the instructor, gives all the commands, the gunner performs the same duties, but without repeating the commands.

16. Duties of No. 1.—Until the command LOAD, he stands square to the front, in line with the axletree, holding the sponge staff about the middle in the right hand, and trailing it at an angle of 450,

For the convenience of instruction, the duties of No. 1 are divided into motions.

 

 

 

 

162                                                MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

 

First motion.—Atthe command LOAD, No. 1 faces to his left, steps obliquely to his right with the right foot, and brings the sponge into a perpendicular position over the right toe, the elbow close to the side, the right hand at the height of the elbow.

Second motion.—Heplants the left foot near, and in line with the wheel, and inclines the sponge across the body to the left, the right opposite to the middle of the body.

Third motion.—Heplaces the right foot twelve inches to the right of the left, heels on the same line; brings the sponge into a horizontal position, and extending the hands towards the ends of the staff; back of the right hand up, that of the left down, rests the sponge-head against the face of the piece; the knees straight, the feet turned out equally, and the body inclined forward.

Fourth motion.—Heintroduces the sponge, drops the left hand by the side of his thigh, and shoves the sponge to the bottom of the chamber.

17. At the command SPONGE, he carefully sponges out the chamber.

Second motion.—Hedraws out the sponge, pressing it upon the bottom of the bore, seizes the staff near the sponge-head with the left hand, back down, and rests it against the face of the piece.

Third motion.—He turns the sponge over by bringing the hands together at the middle of the staff; and giving it a cant with each, throws the sponge over ; at the same time turning the wrists so as to bring the staff horizontal. He then extends the hands towards the ends of the staff, back of the left up, that of the right down.

Fourth motion.—Assoon as the charge is inserted he introduces the rammer-head into the muzzle, and joins the left hand to the right.

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                                           163

 

18. At the command RAM, he sends the charge care­fully home, throwing the left hand over the piece.

Second motion.—Hethrows out the sponge with the right hand, letting it slide through the hand as far as the middle of the staff when he grasps it firmly, and seizing it close to the rammer-head with the left hand, back up, rests it against the face of the piece.

Third motion..—He raises the sponge to the height of his breast, and steps back, right foot first, to his position opposite to the axle-tree; quits the staff with the left hand, and throwing the sponge uppermost, holds it at a trail in the right. He remains facing the piece until the command LOAD, when he steps up and performs the duties just described.

When the loading is not by detail, No. 1 goes through all his duties at the command LOAD.

At the flash of the gun, or command LOAD, he steps up and again performs his duties as before, and so on, until the command CEASE FIRING is given. At this com­mand he resumes his post, faces to the front, first spong­ing out the piece if it has been commenced.

19.Duties of Nos. 2 and 5.—Until the command LOAD, Nos. 2 and 5 stand square to the front, the former in line with the axle-tree, the latter on the left of the am­munition mule, or chests.

At this command, No. 2 faces about and goes to the ammunition chest; and No. 5, having received a round of ammunition from No. 4, carries it to the piece; placing himself opposite to No. 1, and in line with the wheel, inserts the charge as soon as No. 1 has sponged, then steps, back to the post of No. 2, opposite to the axle-tree, and there remains facing the piece until it is fired, when he returns to the ammunition chest, No; 2; having re­ceived a round of ammunition, carries it to within five

 

 

 

 

 

 

164                                                MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

yards of the wheel, where he remains until the piece is fired; he then moves forward and executes the remainder of the service as just described for No. 5.

Nos. 2 and 5, in moving to and from the piece, go at a run and pass each other by the right.

In inserting the charge they should be careful to keep the seam down, and to place the fuze in the axis of the bore.

At the command CEASE FIRING, they resume their posts, facing to the front.

20.Duties of No. 3.—No. 3holds the handle of the lanyard in the right hand, the cord, passing between the fingers, the hook between the forefinger and thumb. At the command LOAD, he takes a friction tube in the left hand, and passes the hook of the lanyard through the eye of the tube from right to left, continuing to hold the hook between the thumb and forefinger. At the word READY, he faces the piece, and steps up, keeping outside of the wheel; inserts the tube, steps back with the right foot, breaks to his rear a full pace with the left foot, and holds the lanyard slightly stretched, the handle at the height of the knee, back of the band up, the left hand against the thigh. At the command FIRE, he gives a smart pull upon the lanyard, being careful to keep the hand low, and then resumes his post.

At the command CEASE FIRING, he winds the lanyard upon its handle, and if dry, puts it in the tube pouch.

21.Duties of No. 4.—No. 4 attends at the ammu­nition chest, serves out ammunition, and prepares and inserts fuzes.

 

 

CHANGING POSTS.

 

 

22.In order to instruct the men in all the duties at

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                         165

 

the piece, the instructor causes them to change posts by the following commands:

 

1. Change Posts. 2. MARCH.

 

At the first command, the cannoneers on the right of’ the piece face about, take off their equipments, and place them on the piece or ammunition chests. At the second command, all step off each taking the post and equip­ments of the one in his front; No. 2 passing around the muzzle to gain the post of No. 1, and No. 4 around the ammunition chest to take that of No. 5.

23. During the intervals of rest, the instructor will explain to the men the nomenclatures of the piece and carriage, and the names and uses of the implements and equipments.

 

 

SERVICE OF THE PIECE WITH DETACHMENTS OF DIFFERENT STRENGTHS.

 

 

24. Two men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points, pricks, primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges, serves ammunition, and loads.

Three men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points, pricks, primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges. No. 2 serves ammunition, and loads.

Four men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points, and pricks. No. 1 sponges. No. 2 serves ammunition, and loads. No. 3 primes and fires.

Five men. No. 4 attends at the chests, and serves ammunition to No. 2, occasionally alternating with him. The other numbers serve as with four men.

Six men. No. 5 alternates habitually with No. 2. No. 4 remains at the chests. The other numbers serve as with four men.

 

 

 

166                                              MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

THE LOCKING ROPE.

 

 

25. The locking rope is habitually coiled and sus­pended from the front are of the saddle of the shaft mule. When it becomes necessary to use it in order to prevent the too great recoil of the piece, No. 2, on receiving orders to that effect, brings it up from the mule, and, with the assistance of No. 1, locks the wheels. No. 2 attaches one end of it by a timber hitch to the folly of the left wheel, near the ground, and No. 1 attaches the other end in the same manner to the right wheel, the rope passing over the stock. The length of the rope should be regulated by the nature of the ground.

When in firing it becomes necessary to run the piece forward, the locking rope is detached; No. 2 carries it; and it is reattached as soon as the piece is in battery. When not in use it is placed on the ground, outside of and near No. 2.

When the, firing is to be discontinued, No. 2 returns it to its place on the saddle. The locking rope should not be used when it can be avoided ; since on rough ground it is liable to break the wheels, and on soft ground to upset the carriage.

 

 

ATTACHING AND DETACHING THE SHAFTS.

 

 

26. To attach the shafts, the instructor commands:

 

ATTACH SHAFTS.

 

The gunner raises the trail ; No. 3 springs in between the shafts, seizes them about twelve inches from the cross­bar, and places: the supporting bar upon the trail; the gunner then puts in the key. and lowers the trail to the ground. No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, puts up

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                       167

 

the sponge; and the cannoneers about the piece assume their posts as in the order of march, shaft. mule hitched in.

27. To detach the shafts, the instructor commands:

 

DETACH SHAFTS.

 

The gunner raises the trail, and unkeys the shafts; No. 3 springs in between them, seizes them about twelve inches from the cross-bar, (the gunner at the same time lowering the trail to the ground,) detaches, and places them as prescribed in No. 12.

No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, takes out the sponge; and the cannoneers about the piece take their posts as in battery.

 

 

MOVING THE PIECE BY MEANS OF THE CANNONEERS.

 

 

28.The shafts detached. The instructor commands:

1.   By hand to the front (or rear.) 2. MARCH.

 

At the first command Nos. 1 and 2, facing to the front, (or rear,) apply themselves to the wheels with the hand nearest to the piece, the former carrying the sponge, and the latter the locking rope in the hand farthest from the piece; the gunner raises the trail. At the second command, all step off. At the com­mand, HALT, they resume their posts.

29.When bricoles are to be used, the shafts attached.The instructor commands:

1.   By bricoles to the front (or rear.) 2. MARCH.

 

At the first command, Nos. 1 and 2 attach the hooks of their bricoles to the washerhooks, and hold the rope with the hand nearest to the piece; the gunner and No. 3 apply themselves to the shafts; all facing in the direc­tion they are to move.

 

 

      

168                                                 MANUAL FOR LIGHTARTILLERY.

 

 

At the second command, all step off.

At the command, HALT, they resume their posts; Nos. 1 and 2 unhooking their bricoles with the hand nearest to the piece.

30.Without bricoles, the shafts attached. The in­structor commands:

1.   Forward        2. MARCH.

 

At the first command, the gunner and No, 3 apply themselves to the shafts; Nos. 1 and 2 at the wheels, as in No. 28.

At the second command, all step off. At the command, HALT, they resume their posts.

When the movement requires it, Nos. 4 and 6 carry the ammunition chests to their new position.

No. 3 carries the shafts when they are detached.

                

SERVICE OF SEVERAL PIECES.

 

31. Forming, and marching the detachments to and from the pieces, are executed as in field artillery.

 

POSTING AND CHANGING THE POSITION OF DETACHMENTS.

 

 

32.To form the order of march, the detachments being in line in front. The instructor commands:

 

1.   Detachments, to your posts. 2. MARCH.

 

At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the de­tachments to the right. At the second, the detachments, Nos. 1 and 2 opening out, file to their posts, each member halting at his place. The chiefs of pieces face them to the front by the command, ABOUT- FACE.

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                           169

 

 

To form the order of march, the detachments being in line, in rear, the instructor gives the same commands.

At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the de­tachments to the left; at the second, the detachments march to their posts; each number halting as before.

33.From the order of march, to the front (or rear.) The instructor commands

 

1.   Detachments front (or rear.) 2. MARCH.

 

To the front. At the second command, repeated by the chiefs of pieces, the detachments, No. 3 and the gunner closing to the centre when clear of the mule, march to the front, file to the left, and are halted, and faced to the front by the chiefs of pieces.

To the rear. At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the detachments about, Nos. 4 and 5 standing fast. At the second command, the detachments, Nos. 1 and 2 closing to the centre as they advance, march to the rear, file to the left, are halted and faced to the front by the chiefs of pieces. In both cases Nos. 4 and 5 take their places on the left, when the detachment is in the position ordered.

 

 

HITCHING AND UNHITCHING.

 

 

34.To the front. The instructor commands:

Hitch to the front.

 

At this command, the shafts are attached, (No. 26,) and the gunner and No. 3 bring the piece about, each by means of the shaft on his own side.

The mule, passing on the right of the piece, is led by its driver to the front and hitched in, the driver backing the mule and buckling the breast straps to the staples;

 

 

170                                               MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY

 

 

the gunner and No. 3 buckling the thill straps around the shafts through the staples, and the breech straps to the staples.

35.To the right (or left.) The instructor commands:

 

Hitch to the right (or left.)

 

At this command the shafts are attached, and turned in the proper direction, and the mule, inclining to the right or left, is led to its place, and hitched in as before

36. To the rear. The instructor commands:

 

Hitch to the rear.

 

At this command, the shafts are attached, the mule brought up, faced about, and hitched in as before.

37. In hitching in to the front, the carriage and ammunition mules, the former first passing the latter, are led up to their proper positions.

In hitching in to the right, (or left,) the mules are, like manner, led up and wheeled to the right or Ieft, at the proper intervals.

In hitching in to the rear, the carriage and ammunition mules, following the shaft mule in the order named are led past the piece to their position in the rear.

For the position of the mules, see No. 3.

 

 

UNHITCHING AND COMING INTO ACTION.

 

38.To the front. The instructor commands

 

Action Front.

 

At this command, the mule is unhitched, the driver unbuckling the breast straps, and the gunner and No. 3 the breech and thill straps. The driver then leads the mule to its place in rear, and the gunner and No. 3, sup-

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                          171

 

 

porting the shafts till the mule is taken out, bring the piece about. This done, the shafts are detached and placed as above.

The carriage and ammunition mules are led at once to their positions, (see No. 3.)

30.To the right, left, or rear. The instructor commands

Action right, (left, or rear.)

At this command, the mule is unhitched; the piece placed in the required direction; the shafts detached, and each mule led to its proper position.

In   action rear, the carriage and ammunition mules pass by the right of the piece to their places in rear. The mules face towards the piece as in action front.

 

 

PACKING AND UNPACKING.

 

40.The mule unhitched, and shafts detached. The instructor commands:

 

1.   Prepare to pack the Piece. 2. PACK THE PIECE.

 

At the first command, the driver leads the shaft mule three yards in rear of the piece, the crupper towards the trail; No. 1, after removing the right cap square, takes the sponge and inserts the rammer head to the bottom of the bore; and No. 2, after removing the left cap square, takes the handspike, and passing one end to No. 3, places it under the knob of the cascable, the loop around the neck. All face towards the mule and prepare to raise the piece.

At the second command, they raise the piece, No. 1 inclining slightly to his left to clear the wheel, and place it upon the saddle, the trunnions in their beds, the vent up, and the cascable towards the head of the mule. No. I,

 

 

v

 

 

172                                                  MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

then withdrawing the sponge, places it, and the handspike which he receives from No. 2, upon the carriage, and goes to the shafts. No. 3, with the assistance of No. 2, secures the piece firmly to the, saddle by means of the lashing rope.

For this purpose he passes one end of the rope (the other being fastened to the near hook of the lashing girth) over the piece to No. 2, who passes it back beneath the transoms, receives it again over the piece, and then fastens it, drawing the rope tightly to the off hook of the lashing girth. This done, No. 1 turns the shafts round and car­ries them near the mule, and Nos. 2 and 3 seizing them near the cross-bar, with the assistance of No. 1 acting at the ends, raise and place them upon the mule, resting the cross-bar upon the cascable, and the shafts upon the arcs; Nos. 2 and 3, the latter first putting the key in its place, then secure the shafts firmly by means of the lashing straps.

 

 

PACKING THE CARRIAGE UPON THE MULE.

 

41.The instructor commands:

 

1.  Prepare to pack the carriage.   2.  PACK THE CARRIAGE.

 

At the first command, the driver leads the carriage mule in front of the carriage, and three yards from it, the crupper towards the head of the carriage; the gunner, first replacing the cap squares, raises the head of the car­riage, and Nos. 4 and 5, at the right and left wheels re­spectively, remove the linchpins and washers, take off the wheels, and lay them on the ground behind them, the larger end of the nave uppermost. This done, Nos. 4 and 5 replace the linchpins and washers, and seize the arms of the axle-tree; and the gunner, quitting the head of the

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                        173

 

carriage, seizes the trail; all face towards the mule, and prepare to raise the carriage.

At the second command, they raise the carriage and place it upon the saddle, between the transoms; the axle-tree just in front of the forward arc, the understraps upon the arc, and the nuts of the trunnion plate bolts just in rear of it. The carriage having been placed, No. 4, with the assistance of No. 5,secures it with the lashing cord, taking two turns with the cord round the stock and tran­soms, and then tying it. This done, they suspend the wheels by the fellies, from the arms of the axle-trees; the large end of the nave between the arcs, and resting against the leather of the outside bar, and secure them firmly by means of the lashing straps.

The whole is then strongly bound by the lashing rope. For this purpose, No. 5,having fastened one end to the near hook of the lashing girth, passes the rope up from the inside between the nearest convenient felly and spoke, and continues it on, pressing it in front of and against the outside part of the nave, embracing one or more spokes, to the top felly, under which, and over the stock, he passes it to No. 4, who, after passing it round a spoke of the off wheel, returns it under the transoms of the saddle to No. 5,by whom it is passed round a spoke and again handed over the stock to No. 4. The latter then carries it down under the top felly, around the spokes, and against the nave, as with the near wheel, to the off hook of the lash­ing girth, and then fastens it.

For greater security, the gunner may tie the fellies of the two wheels together, behind the elevating screw, with the locking rope.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

174                                                MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

 

 

PACKINGTHE AMMUNITION CHESTS UPON THE MULE.

 

 

42. The instructor commands:

 

1.   Prepare to pack the chests.   2. PACK THE CHESTS.

 

At the first command, the driver leads the mule from the rear to the distance of one yard from the chests, its head still facing them; Nos. 2 and 4 hasten to the chest on the right, and Nos. 1 and 5 to that on the left, and seize them by the handles; Nos. I and 2 by those in front, and Nos. 4 and 5 by those in rear.

At the second command, they raise the chests, carry them to the saddle, and attach the chains to the hooks, the chests inclining slightly towards the rear of the mule Nos. 4 and 5 then secure them with the lashing straps and lashing rope.

This duty might be done with three men, by first hook­ing on one chest, and letting one man support it until the other is hooked on.

 

 

PACKING THE MULES AT ONE COMMAND.

 

 

43. The instructor commands

 

Pack the mules.

 

At this command, the driver leads the mules to their proper positions; Nos. 1, 2, and 3 proceed to pack the piece, and Nos. 4, 5, and the gunner the carriage, as soon as the piece is removed. This done, Nos. 1, 2, 4, and 5 pack the ammunition chests.

Each cannoneer performs his duty as directed in Nos.

40, 41, 42.

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                         175

 

 

 

UNPACKING THE CARRIAGE.

 

 

44. The instructor commands:

 

1.   Prepare to unpack the Carriage.     2. UNPACK THE

CARRIAGE.

 

At the first command, Nos. 4 and 5 unbuckle the lash­ing straps, detach the lashing rope, take off the wheels, and lay them upon the ground, the large end of the nave uppermost. If the locking rope has been used, the gun­ner unties and detaches it. Nos. 4 and 5 then untie and remove the lashing cord, and facing to the rear, seize the arms of the axle-tree; the gunner facing to the front seizes the trail. All prepare to raise the carriage.

At the second command, they raise the carriage, and carry it three yards in rear of the mule; the gunner then, placing the trail upon the ground, seizes the head of the carriage and holds it up; Nos. 4 and 5, removing the linchpins and washers, retain them in their hands, put on the wheels, and then replace the linchpins and washers. The gunner puts up the locking rope, and Nos. 4 and 5 the lashing rope.

 

 

UNPACKING THE PIECE.

 

45.The instructor commands:

1.       Prepare to unpack the Piece.  2. UNPACK THE PIECE.

2.        

At the first command, the driver leads the mule in rear of and three yards from the carriage, the crupper towards the trail; Nos. 2 and 3 unbuckle the lashing straps, and, with the assistance of No. 1 acting at the ends, disengage the shafts from the saddle; No. 1 then takes hold of them near the cross-bar, turns them round,

 

 

 

176                                                 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.

 

 

and lays them on the ground, in the position described in No. 12. This done, Nos. 2 and 3 detach the lashing rope; and No. 1, having taken the sponge and handspike, hands the latter to No. 2, and inserts the former into the bore of the piece. No. 2 then applies his handspike as in No. 40; when all, facing towards the carriage, prepare to raise the piece.

At the second command, they raise the piece, No. 1 inclining slightly to his right to clear the wheel, and place it upon its carriage. No. 1 puts up the sponge, No. 2 the handspike, and No. 3 secures the cap squares.

 

 

UNPACKING THE AMMUNITION CHESTS.

 

 

46.The instructor commands

 

1. Prepare to unpack the Chests.   2. UNPACK THE CHESTS.

 

At the first command, Nos. 2 and 4 seize the handles of the right chest, and Nos. 1 and S those of the left; Nos. 4 and 5 having first unbuckled the lashing straps, and detached the lashing rope.

At the second command, they raise the chests, unhook them, and lay them on the ground one yard from the mule.

 

 

UNPACKING THE MULES AT ONE COMMAND.

 

 

47.  The instructor commands:

48.   

Unpack the mules.

 

At this command, the drivers place the shaft and car­riage mules eight yards apart, the crupper towards the place the piece is to occupy; the gunner, and Nos. 4 and 5 proceed to unpack the carriage, and Nos. 1, 2, and 3

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY.                                          177

 

the piece. The sponge and handspike are not taken fromthe carriage until it is on the ground, nor is the piece taken from the saddle until the carriage is mounted on its wheels. Each cannoneer performs his duty as directed in Nos. 44 and 45.

If the ammunition chests are to be unpacked, it is done as soon as the piece is mounted, as prescribed in No. 40.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER XII.

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

 

 

1. The manner of serving heavy artillery varies with the kind of piece, and the carriage upon which it is mounted.

2. There are four kinds of heavy pieces in the land service, viz.: the GUN, the HOWITZER, the MORTAR, and the COLUMBIAD.

They are distinguished according to their use, as siege, garrison, and sea-coast artillery.

For their service six distinct kinds of carriages are necessary, viz.: the siege, the barbette, the casemate, the flank-casemate, the columbiad, and the carriage upon which the MORTAR IS mounted, which is technically called its bed.

Siege artillery is used in the attack of places; and as it follows armies in their operations, is mounted upon car­riages which serve for its transportation.

Garrison artillery is employed in the defence of forts, more especially those of the interior; and sea-coast artil­lery, consisting of the heaviest calibres, is used for the defence of the sea-coast. Their carriages do not subserve the purpose of transportation; the barbette carriage may,

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                       179

 

however, be used for moving its piece for short distance; as fromone front of a work to another.

The foIlowing are the kinds and calibres of HEAVY ARTILLERYused in the land service of the United States:

 

Kind of Ordnance.

 

 

Calibre.

 

Material.

 

 

 

GUNS.

 

 

 

 

 

HOWITZERS.

 

 

COLUMBIADS.

 

 

 

 

 

MORTARS.

}

}

}

}

 

Siege and Garrison.

 

 

 

Sea-coast.

 

 

 

Siege and Garrison.

 

 

Sea-coast.

 

 

 

 

Siege.

 

Sea-coast.

 

 

 

Stone.

Coehorn.

{

{

{

{

{

{

 

12-pdr.

18-pdr.

24-pdr.

 

32-pdr. 42-pdr.

 

 

8-inch.

24-pdr

 

8-inch. 10-inch.

 

 

8-inch. 10-inch.

 

 

10-inch. 13-inch.

 

16-inch.

24-pdr.

 

}

 

 

}

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Iron.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bronze.








3.   The detachment for serving a piece is formed in two ranks, and numbered from right to left. The odd numbers form the rear rank, and serve on the right of the piece; the even numbers and the gunner form the front rank, and serve on its left. The right file is num­bered 1 and 2; the next file 3 and 4; the gunner is un­covered, and generally on the left of No. 4; and on his left are as many files as are deemed necessary, numbered 5 and 6, 7 and 8, etc.

4.   A piece is in battery whenit is in the proper po­sition to be fired.

The right of a piece, when in battery, is the right of the cannoneer when facing to the object to be fired at;

 

 

 

 

 

 

180                                               MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

the front is the direction towards which the muzzle points.

The term battery is applied to one or more pieces, or to the places where the pieces are fired.

A plaform is the support upon which a piece is ma­neuvred when in battery.

5. The detachment is marched to the battery by a flank. It is halted, and faced to the front, when its centre is opposite to the middle of the platform, and (ifthere be room) four yards from it.

6. To cause the cannoneers to take their posts, the instructor commands:

 

1. Detachment, to your posts. 2. MARCH.

 

At the first command, the detachment is faced to the right by the chief of piece.

At the second command, it files to the left, and the two flanksseparate; the rear rank marching to the right of the piece, and the front rank to the left, in lines parallel to its axis. As each man arrives at his post, he halts and faces to the piece; Nos. 1 and 2 one yard from the epaulment, parapet, or scarp, their breasts eighteen inches outside of the wheels of the carriage or cheeks of the mortar bed, as the case may be; and the other numbers and the gunner, dressing on Nos. 1 and 2 respectively at intervals of one yard, except that between Nos. 3 and 5 there is an interval of two yards. With the mortar, Nos. 1 and 2 are opposite to the front maneuvring bolts, and Nos. 3 and 4 opposite to those in the rear.

Under the fire of the enemy, the men will be directed to cover themselves by the parapet as much as may be consistent with the execution of their duties.

7. The chief of piece (a non-commissioned officer) assists the instructor in effecting a correct execution of

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                          181

 

 

the movements. While at the battery, he will generally be one yard outside of the cannoneers of the left, facing the piece, and two yards in rear of the platform or rear­most part of the carriage. He communicates and attends to the execution of all orders he may receive in relation to the service of his piece; as, for instance, the kind of ammunition to be used, the weight of charge, the kind and length of fuze, etc.

8.   The movements of the cannoneers at the battery are in double-quick time.

9.   Posts are changed at the discretion of the in­structor.

10.To allow the detachment to rest, the instructor commands:

In place. REST; or, REST.

 

The cannoneers lay down their handspikes.

In the first case, the men remain at their posts; in the second case, they may leave their posts, but will re­main near the piece.

To resume the exercise, the instructor commands:

 

Attention—DETACHMENT.

 

At which command, all resume their posts and hand. spikes.

11.Until the cannoneer becomes well versed in his duties at the piece, the instructor will himself; by way of example, occasionally execute the movements which ho orders. In the intervals of rest he will minutely instruct the men in the names and uses of the implements, and in the nomenclatures of the piece, its carriage or bed, and of the parts of the fortification near the battery. In the course of the instruction, he will require every man to point out and designate by name all the parts enumerated in these nomenclatures, and to answer questions relative

 

 

 

182                                                 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY

 

to the service of the piece; such as the weight of charge, the manner of making cartridges and wads, of heating shot and throwing hot shot, of laying platforms, pointing, etc. And although he is to consider precision of move­ment as highly essential, yet he is to inculcate that some­thing more is necessary than a merely mechanical per­formance of duty. He will, therefore, endeavor to im­press upon the cannoneer not only the habit of a soldier-like manner of working his gun, but an accurate under­standing of all the elements necessary to the efficiency of its lire.

12. To leave the battery, the instructor commands:

 

1. Detachment, rear. 2. MARCH.

 

At the first command, the detachment is faced from the epaulment by the chief of piece.

At the second command, it marches to the rear—the cannoneers of the left closing upon those of the right— files to the right, and is halted and faced to the front by the chief of piece, so as to bring its centre opposite to the middle of the platform, and four yards from it. The chief of piece places himself upon the right.

The detachment is marched from the battery by a flank.

 

 

LESSON 1.

 

 

Service of a Gun mounted on a siege carriage.

 

Seven men are necessary; one gunner and six other cannoneers.

13.The piece is in battery upon its platform.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                           183

 

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows:

 

HANDSPIKES,

 

 

 

 

SPONGE -RAMMER,

 

 

 

PASS-BOX,

 

 

 

TUBE-POUCH, .        

 

 

 

GUNNERS-POUCH,

 

 

 

CHOCKS,

 

VENT-COVER,

 

TOMPION,

 

 

BROOM,

{

 

{

 

{

{

 

{

 

{

 

 

 

 

{

Three on each side of the carriage leaning against the epaulment, in line with the cannoneers.

 

 

One yard behind and parallel to the line of cannoneers of the right, the sponge uppermost, the sponge andrammer-heads turned from the epaul­ment, and supported upon a prop.

 

 

Against the epaulment, outside of the pile of balls.

 

Containing friction tubes, and the lan­yard, which is habitually wound in the form of St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle. Suspended from theknob of the cascable.

 

Containing the gunner’s level, breech sight, fingerstall, priming wire, gim­let, vent-punch, and chalk. Sus­pended from the knob of the cascable.

 

 

One on each side of the piece, near the ends of the hurter.

Covering the vent.

 

In the muzzle.

 

Leaning against the epaulment, out­side of the pile of balls.

           

When several guns are served together, there will be only one gunner’s level and two vent-punches, to each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the. same battery there will be one worm, one ladle, and one wrench.

The balls are regularly piled on the left of the piece, near the epaulment, and close to the edge of the plat­form.

 

 

 

184                                          MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

The wads are placed between the epaulment and the balls, partly resting on them.

14.The cannoneers having been marched to thcir posts, the instructor directs them to plac6 their muskets against the epaulment, and then explains to them the names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the gun, its carriage and the battery.

15.To cause the implements to be distributed, the in­structor commands:

 

Take Implements.

 

The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable; takes off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the epaulment, outside of the pass-box; gives the tube-pouch to No. 3; equips himself with his own pouch and the fingerstall, wearing the latter on the second finger of the left hand; levels the piece by the elevating screw; ap­plies his level to ascertain the highest points of the base-ring and swell of the muzzle, which he marks with chalk, and resumes his post.

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch.

Nos. 1 and 2, after passing two handspikes each to Nos. 3 and 4, take each one for himself. Nos. 5 and 6 receive theirs from Nos. 3 and 4

16.The handspike is held in both hands; the hand nearest to the epaulment grasping it near the small end and at the height of the shoulder, back of the hand down, the arm extended naturally; the butt of the handspike upon the platform on the side farthest from the epaul­ment, and six inches in advance of the alignment.

17.When the cannoneer lays down his handspike, he places it directly before him, about six inches in advance of and parallel to the alignment, time small end towards the epaulment; and whenever he thus lays it

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                     185

 

 

down for the discharge of any particular duty, he will re­sume it on returning to his post after the completion of that duty.

18. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed by the following commands:

 

1. From BATTERY.

 

The gunner moves two paces to his right.

Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, facing from the epaulment, unbar; Nos. 1 and 2 under the front of the wheels; Nos. 3 and 4 through the rear spokes of the wheels near the fully, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks; and Nos. 5and 6 under the manoeuving bolts.

All being ready, the gunner gives the command HEAVE, which will be repeated as often as may be neces­sary. He sees Nos. 5 and 6 guide the trail in prolongation of the directrix of the embrasare, and as soon as the face of the piece is about one yard from the epaulment, commands HALT. All unbar, and resume their posts, Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels.

 

2. Load by Detail. LOAD.

 

19. Nos. 1, 2 and 4 lay down their handspikes.

No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the vent-cover.

No. 1 faces once and a half to his left; steps over the sponge and rammer; faces to the piece; takes the sponge with both hands, the back down, the right hand three feet from the sponge head, the left hand eighteen inches nearer to it, returns to the piece, entering the staff in the em­brasure; places the left foot in line with the face of the piece, half way between it and the wheels; breaks to the right with the right foot, the heels on a line parallel to the direction of the piece, the left leg straightened, the

 


 

 

186                                               MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

right knee bent, the body erect upon the haunches; and rests the end of the sponge in the muzzle, the staff in the prolongation of the bore, supported by the right hand, the right arm extended, the left hand flat against the side of the thigh.

No. 3 steps to the muzzle, and occupies a position on the left of the piece corresponding to that of No. 1 on its right. He seizes the staff with the left hand, back down, near to and outside of the hand of No. 1.

No. 2, facing towards the epaulment, embars under the breech, and maintains the piece in a convenient position for inserting the sponge, until he receives a signal from the gunner to unbar. He then lays down his handspike; steps over the rammer, and seizes the staff with both hands, as prescribed for the sponge; and stands ready to exchange with No. 1.

No.4 takes the pass-box and goes to the rear for a cartridge; returns with it, and places himself, facing the piece, about eighteen inches to the rear and right of No.2.

The gunner places himself near the stock, the left foot advanced, closes the vent with the second finger of the left hand, bending well forward to cover himself by the breech; turns the elevating screw with the right hand, so as to adjust the piece conveniently for loading: and makes a signal for No. 3 to unbar.

20. In the mean time Nos. 1 and 2 insert the sponge by the following motions:

First motion.—Theyinsert the sponge as far as the hand of No. 1, bodies erect, shoulders square.

Second motion.—They slide the hand along the staff and seize it at arm’s length.

Third motion.—Theyforce the sponge down as prescribed in the first motion.

 

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                           187

 

Fourth motion.—They repeat the second motion.

Fifth motion.—They push the sponge to the bottom of the bore. No. 1 replaces the left hand on the staff, back up, six inches nearer to the muzzle than the right. No. 2 places the right hand, back up, between the hands of No. 1.

If in executing these motions, or the corresponding ones with the rammer, it be found that the sponge or rammer is at home at the third or fourth motion, then what is prescribed for the fifth motion will be performed at the third or fourth. The knee on the side towards which the body is to be inclined is always bent, the other straightened; and the weight of the body added, as much as possible, to the effort exerted by the arms.

 

3. SPONGE.

 

21. Nos. 1 and 2, pressing the sponge firmly against the bottom of the bore, turn it three times from right to left, and three times from left to right; replace the hands on the thighs; and withdraw the sponge by motions con­trary to those prescribed for inserting it.

 

Remark.—To handle the sponge when it is now and fits tight, it may become necessary for Nos. 1 and 2 to use both hands. In this case it will be inserted and withdrawn by short and quick motions.

 

No. 2 quits the staff and turning towards No 4, re­ceives from him the cartridge, which he takes in both bands, back down, and introduces into the bore bottom foremost, seams to the sides; he then grasps the rammer in the way prescribed for the sponge.

No. 1, rising upon the right leg arid turning towards his left, passes the sponge above the rammer with the left hand to No. 3, and receiving the rammer with the right, presents it as prescribed for the sponge, except that he

 

 

 

 

188                                                 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

rests the rammer-head against the right side of’ the face of the piece.

No. 3, as soon as the sponge is withdrawn, passing the rammer under the sponge into the embrasure with the right hand, receives the sponge from No. 1 with the left, replaces it upon the prop, and resumes his post.

No. 4, setting down the pass-box, takes out the car­tridge and presents it in both hands to No. 2, the choke to the front; returns the pass-box to its place; and picks up a ball, and afterwards a wad, should one be re­quired.

Nos. 1 and 2 force down the cartridge by the motions prescribed for forcing down the sponge.

 

4. RAM.

 

22. Nos. 1 and 2, drawing the rammer out to the full extent of their arms, ram with a single stroke. No. 2 quits the staff; and turning towards No. 4, receives from him the ball and wad, whilst No. 1 throws out the ram­mer, and holds the head against the right side of the face of’ the piece. No. 2, receiving successively the ball and wad, introduces them into the bore, the ball first, and seizes the staff with the left hand. No. 4 then resumes his post.

Nos. 1 and 2 force down the ball and wad together by the same motions, and ram in the same manner as prescribed for the cartridge. No. 2 quits the rammer; sweeps, if necessary, the platform on his own side; passes the broom to No. 1; and resumes his post. No. 1 throws out the rammer, and places it upon the prop below the sponge; finishes the sweeping, and resumes his post.

The gunner pricks, leaving the priming wire in the vent; resumes his post; and, if firing beyond point-blank range, adjusts the breech-sight to the distance.

 

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                       189

 

5. IN BATTERY.

 

23.Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and with Nos. 3, 4, 5, and 6, all facing towards the epaulment, embar; Nos. 1 and 2 through the front spokes of the wheels near the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks; Nos. 3 and 4 under the rear of the wheels; and Nos. 5 and 6 under the maneuvring bolts perpendicularly to the stock. All being ready, the gunner commands HEAVE, and the piece is run into battery; Nos. 5 and 6 being careful to guide the chase into the middle of the embrasure. As soon as the wheels touch the hurter, he commands HALT. All unbar, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 resume their posts.

 

6. POINT.

 

24.No. 3 lays down his handspike, passes the hook of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to rear, and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right hand, the hook between the thumb and forefinger.

Nos. 5 and 6 embar under and perpendicularly to the trail, near the maneuvring bolts.

The gunner, placing himself at the stock, as at the command LOAD, withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by Nos. 5 and 6, gives the direction, causing the trail to be moved by commanding LEFT, or RIGHT, tapping at the same time on the right side of the breech for No. 5 to move the trail to the left, or on the left side for No. 6 to move it to the right.

He then places the centre point of the breech-sight ac­curately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and by the elevating screw gives the proper elevation, rectifying the direction, if necessary.

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left leg, and gives the word READY, making a signal with both hands, at which Nos. 5 and 6 unbar, and

 

 

 

190                                                 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY

 

 

resume their posts; takes the breech-sight with the left hand, and goes to the windward to observe the effect of the shot.

No. 3 inserts the tube in the vent, drops the handle, allowing the lanyard to uncoil as he steps hack to his post, holding it slightly stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up; and breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the left hand against the thigh.

At the word READY, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, and breaking off with the feet furthest from the epaul­ment, stand ready to chock the wheels.

25.In directing the piece to be fired, the instructor will designate it by its number, as, for example:

7. Number one—FIRE.

 

No. 3 gives a smart pull upon the lanyard.

Immediately after the discharge of the piece, Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels, and resume the erect position. No.3 resumes the erect position, and rewinds the lanyard in St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle, returning it if dry to the tube-pouch. The gunner, having observed the effect of the shot, returns to his post.

26.Whenever the piece is to be fired by a lock, port-fire, or slow-match, it will be done by No. 3, as prescribed for No. 4, in the instruction for field artillery.

27.To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY.

 

 

TO CHANGE POSTS.

 

28.To change posts the instructor commands:

 

1.   CHANGE POSTS. 2. MARCH. 3. CALL OFF.

 

At the first command the cannoneers lay down their

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                       191

 

handspikes; place their equipments on the parts of the carriage nearest to them; and face to their left.

At the second command, they step off, each advancing one post; No. 2 taking that of No. 1. Nos. 2 and 5 pass to the rear of the trail; No. 2 on the outside of all the caunoneers. On arriving at their posts, they face to the piece, and equip themselves.

At the third command, they call on; according to the posts they are to occupy.

 

 

TO LOAD FOR ACTION.

 

29. The cannoneers having been sufficiently instructed in the details of the movements, the instructor com­mands:

 

Load for action—LOAD.

 

The piece is run from battery, loaded, run into battery, pointed, and prepared for bring, by the following commands from the gunner: FROM BATTERY—LOAD—IN BATTERY—POINT—READY.

 

At the command or signal from the instructor to com­mence firing, the gunner gives the command FIRE, and continues the action until the instructor directs the firing to cease.

 

TO CEASE FIRING.

 

 

30.  To cause the firing to cease, the instructor com­mands:

31.   

CEASE FIRING.

 

Whether the cannoneers are loading by detail or for action, the piece is sponged out, and all resume their posts. If the cartridge has been inserted, the loading will

 

 

 

192                                               MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

be completed, unless the instructor should otherwise direct.

 

TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS.

 

 

31.To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having ordered the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be run into battery, gives the following commands:

 

1. SECURE PIECE.

 

No. 2 returns the tompion to the muzzle, the gunner puts on the vent cover, which he receives from No. 2, and depresses the piece.

 

2. REPLACE IMPLEMENTS.

 

Nos. 1 and 2 replace the handspikes against the epaul­ment, those of Nos. 3, 4, 5 and 6 being passed to them by Nos. 3 and 4 for that purpose. The gunner hangs the pouches upon the knob of the cascable.

 

 

TO LEAVE THE BATTERY.

 

 

32.The instructor causes the muskets to be taken; forms the detachment in rear of the piece; and marches it from the battery as prescribed in No. 12.

33.Remarks.—Theservice of a 24-pdr. siege gun, as it respects running from and to battery, and pointing, is performed by five men, as prescribed for the siege howitzer. Five men suffice for the service of the 18 and 12.pdrs. To perform, however, all the duties incident to a battery of heavy artillery on a war establishment, including trans-portation and the mechanical maneuvres, the details for its daily service, at three reliefs, should allow at least twenty privates to each piece.

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                           193

 

 

 

TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS.

 

 

34.The smallest number of men with which heavy pieces can be served with facility, has been given as five. It may be necessary, however, from the men being dis­abled, or from other circumstances, to serve a gun with a less number.

With four men.—Theywill be told off as gunner, and Nos. 1, 2, and 3. In this case No. 2 will, in addition to his own duties, perform those of’ No. 4.

With three men.—They will be told off as gunner, and Nos. 1 and 2. No. 1 performs the duties prescribed for No. 3, as well as his own. No. 2 performs those of No. 4, as in the preceding case.

When No. 2 serves ammunition, he goes for the cartridge, and places the pass-box behind his post, before as­sisting No. 1 to sponge.

 

 

TRANSPORTATION.

 

 

35.The transportation of a 24-pdr. gun requires ten horses and five drivers; an 18-pdr. eight horses and four drivers; a battery wagon six horses and three drivers; and spare carriages—at the rate of one for every five pieces—require each six horses and three drivers.

 

 

CHARGES, ETC.

 

 

36.The ordinary service charge of powder for heavy guns is one-fourth the weight of the shot. For firing double shot it is one-sixth that weight. The breaching charge is one-third the weight of the shot.

 

 

194          MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

Range of a 24-pdr., at an angle of 10 30’, (point blank,)

       charge 6 lbs     .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       950 yards.

Range of a 24-pdr., at an angle of 50, charge 6 lbs.   .   .   .     1900    “

Range of an 18-pdr., at an angle of 10 30’, charge 4 ½ lbs.  .   800    “
Range of an 18-pdr., at an angle of 50, charge 4 ½  lbs           1600   

Proof range of powder            .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  300   
The range of a 12-pd. is about the same as that of an
     18-pdr.
Greatest elevation that a 24-pdr. carriage admits.   .   .   .      120
Greatest elevation that an 18.pdr. carriage admits.   .   .   .    120
Greatest elevation that a 12-pdr. carriage admits.   .   .   .     
130
Greatest depression that a 24-pdr. carriage admits    .   .   .   . 40
Greatest depression that an 18-pdr. carriage admits.   .   .       40
Greatest depression that a 12-pdr. carriage admits    .   .   .   . 40

 

 

WADS.

 

 

37.Wads are not generally necessary, except when firing at angles of depression; and then only one is used, and that on the ball. When, however, the piece has been fired so often that the ball has caused a lodgment in the bore, it is well to use wads differing in length, according to the position and extent of the lodgment, between the shot and the cartridge.

Hay wads may be made by twisting hay into a rope of about one inch in diameter, folding it together of any desired length, and then winding the folds from one end to the other, leaving the wad a little larger than the bore.

 

 

BREACHING BATTERIES.

 

 

38.Breaching batteries established against walls are,

First. To make a horizontal section the length of the desired breach along the scarp, at one-third its height from the bottom of the ditch, and to a depth equal to the thick­ness of the wall.

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAYY ARTILLERY.                                     195

 

Secondly. To make vertical cuts through the wall, not further than ten yards apart, and not exceeding one to each piece; beginning at the horizontal section, and as­cending gradually to the top of the wall.

Thirdly. To fire at the most prominent points of the masonry left standing; beginning always at the bottom, and gradually approaching to the top.

Fourthly. To fire into the broken’ mass with howitzers until the breach is practicable.

Breaches of more than twenty yards in length have been opened by way of experiment, and rendered prac­ticable, in less than ten hours, by about two hundred and thirty 24-pdr. balls and forty shells in one case, and by three hundred 18-pdr. balls and’ forty shells in another.

 

RAPIDITY OF FIRING.

 

39.Iron guns sustain long-continued and rapid firing better than brass guns. An iron gun should sustain twelve hundred discharges, at the rate of twelve an hour; but whatever may be the rate of fire, it is deemed unsafe after that number of discharges. As many as twenty an hour have been made for sixteen consecutive hours.

 

PENETRATION OF SHOT.

 

40.The penetration of balls increases to a certain ex­tent with their calibre. The mean result, from several experiments, gives the penetration of a 24-pdr. ball, with the charge of one-third its weight, at the distance of one hundred yards, as follows:

                                                  Feet,     Inches.
            In earth of old parapets               5      6
            In earth recently thrown up       15      0
            In oak weed1 sound and hard      4      6
            In rubble stone and masonry       1      10
            In brick                                       3       0

 

 

 

196                                          MANUAL. FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

 

LESSON II.

 

 

Service of am 8-inch Siege Howitzer, mounted on a 24-pdr.

Siege Carriage.

 

Five men are necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers.

41.The piece is in battery upon its platform.

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows:

 

 

HANDSPIKES,

 

 

 

 

SPONGE  & RAMMER,

 

 

 

HAVERSACK,

 

 

 

 

 

 

TUBE-POUCH, .         

 

 

 

GUNNERS-POUCH,

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOADING –TONGS

QUADRENT

PLUMMET

SCRAPER

WIPER

SPLINTS

 

GRUMMET-WAD

 

 

CHOCKS,

 

VENT-COVER,

 

TOMPION,

 

BROOM,

{

 

{

 

{

 

{

 

{

 

 

}

 

{

 

 

 

 

{

Three on the left side of the carriage, and two on the right, leaning against the epaulment, in line with the cannoneers.

 

 

On props, eighteen inches behind and parallel to the cannoneers of the right, the sponge-head turned towards the epaul­ment.

 

Containing fuzes, a pair of sleeves, and a priming-wire, bent at right angles at the point for withdrawing the cartridge used in instruction. Sus­pended from the knob of the cas­cable.

 

 

Containing friction tubes, and the lan­yard, wound in St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle. Suspended from theknob of the cascable.

 

Containing the gunner’s level, breech sight, fingerstall, priming wire, gim­let, vent-punch, and chalk. Sus­pended from the knob of the cascable.

 

 

 

 

In a basket or shelf, against the epaulment, outside of and near the handspikes of the left.

 

 

 

On the end of the hurter, near No. 2.

 

One on each side of the piece, near the ends of the hurter.

 

Covering the vent.

 

In the muzzle.

 

Leaning against the epaulment, out­side of the pile of basket, or shelf.

When several howitzers are served together, there will be only one gunner’s level and two vent-punches to each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same bat­tery there will be one wrench.

One shell and one bombazine cartridge bag for in­struction—the bag filled with sawdust, and having loops of’ thread at the choke end—are at the magazine, or other safe place in rear of the piece.

42. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the instructor directs’ them to place their muskets against the epaulment, and then explains to them the names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the howitzer, its carriage, and the battery.

43. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor commands:

 

TAKE IMPLEMENTS.

 

The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable; takes off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the epaulment, outside of the basket; gives the tube-pouch to

 

 

 

 

198                                            MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

No. 8, and the haversack to No. 4; and equips himself with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the lat­ter on the second finger of the left hand.

No. 2 puts on the sleeves.

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch.

No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he wears from the right shoulder to the left side; takes out the sleeves; and assists No. 2 to put them on.

Nos 1 and 2, after passing handspikes to Nos. 3 and 4 and the gunner, take each one for himself. The gunner, receiving his from No. 4, lays it in the allignment, the small end towards the epaulment, and two yards to his right. The other handspikes are held, laid down, and re­sumed, as prescribed in Nos. 15 and 10.

The gunner directs No. 3 to raise the breech to enable him to level the piece; applies his level to ascertain the highest points of the base-ring and muzzle-band which he marks with chalk; and resumes his post.

44. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed by the following commands:

 

1. FROM BATTERY.

 

The gunner moves two paces to his right.

Nos. 1,2, 8, and 4, facing from the epaulment, embar:

Nos. 1 and 2 through the rear spokes of the wheels, near the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks; and Nos. 3 and 4 under the mana3uvring bolts.

All being ready, the gunner gives the command HEAVE, which will be repeated as often as may be neces­sary. He sees that Nos. 3 and 4 guide the trail in pro­longation of the directrix of the embrasure, and as soon as the wheels are about one yard from the epaulment, commands HALT. All unbar, and resume their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels.

 

 

 

          MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                        199

 

          2.   Load by detail—LOAD.

 

45. Nos. 1, 2, and 4 lay down their handspikes.

No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the vent-cover; sweeps, if necessary, his side of the platform; passes the broom to the right side of the piece; and resumes his post.

No. 1 faces to his right, and seizes the sponge-staff at its middle with the right hand, back up ; places himself at the muzzle; forces the sponge to the bottom of the chamber; and grasps the staff with both hands: all nearly as in field artillery.

No. 3, facing towards the epaulment, embars under the breech or knob of the cascable, until he receives a sig­nal from the gunner to unbar, when he resumes his post.

No. 4 goes to the rear for a cartridge and shell; puts the cartridge in his haversack; takes the shell in both hands; returns and places it on the grummet-wad; and stands, facing the piece, about eighteen inches to the rear and left of No. 2.

The gunner places himself near the stock, as in No. 18, and closes the vent with the second finger of the left hand ; adjusts the piece with the quoin to about one degree’s elevation; and makes a sign for No. 3 to unbar.

 

3. SPONGE.

 

40. No. 1, pressing the sponge firmly against the bot­tom of the chamber, turns it three times from right to left, and three times from left to right; draws it out to the front of the chamber; wipes out the bore; reinserts the sponge along the upper side of the bore as far as the chamber; draws it entirely out, pressing it upon the lower side of the bore; turns the sponge over towards the embrasure; and presents the rammer-head against

 

 

 

 

200                                              MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

the right side of the face of the piece, holding the staff in both hands.

No. 2, as soon as the sponging is completed, takes the tongs and occupies a position at the muzzle corresponding to that prescribed for No. 1 on the right; turns to his left on the right heel, advancing the left foot, and presents the tongs in both hands, the left hand nearest him, the tongs opened, their legs in the same vertical plane.

No. 4 takes out the cartridge and inserts it as far as its middle in the tongs, choke foremost, the seam down­wards; removes the stopper from, and inserts the fuze into, the fuze plug; scrapes its end; and takes the wiper.

No. 2, having received the cartridge in the tongs, makes a face and a half to his right on the right heel, and breaks off with the left foot; places the right hand against the head of the left cheek of the carriage, and with the left hand introduces the cartridge into the chamber, keep­ing the legs of the tongs in a vertical plane; then slightly withdrawing and closing the tongs, he presses them in the direction of the axis of the piece against the end of’ the cartridge, and shoves it home. Withdrawing the tongs, he makes a face and a half to his left on the right heel, and puts the hooks of the tongs into the cars of the shell, which he lifts amid holds about two feet from the ground, whilst No. 4 wipes it.

No. 1, as soon as the tongs are withdrawn, inserts the rammer, and holds it with the head against the cartridge, the staff in the axis of the piece.

 

4. RAM.

 

47. No. 1 presses firmly upon the cartridge; throws out the rammer, and places it upon the props; sweeps, if necessary, his side of the platform; passes the broom to the left side of the piece; and resumes his post.

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                       201

 

No. 2 introduces the shell, and shoves it home in a similar to that prescribed for the cartridge; with­draws the hooks, and looks to see that the fuze is in the axis of the piece.

If the piece is to be fired horizontally, or at an angle of depression, No. 4, having replaced the wiper, hands a splint to No. 2, and resumes his post.

No. 2 presses the splint under the shell with the left hand; replaces the tongs and broom; and resumes his post.

The gunner pricks, leaving the priming-wire in the vent, and resumes his post.

 

5.IN BATTERY.

 

48. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and with Nos. 3 and 4, all facing towards the epaulment, embar: Nos. 1 and 2 through the front spokes of the wheels, near the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks; and Nos. 3 and 4 under the rear of the wheels.

The gunner, seizing his handspike, embars under the manoeuvring bolts; gives the command HEAVE; and guides the piece to the middle of the embrasure; as soon as the wheels touch the hurter, he commands HALT. All unbar, and resume their posts.

 

6. POINT.

 

49. Nos. 1 and 4 embar under and perpendicularly to the trail, near the manoeuvring bolts.

No. 2, facing towards the epaulment, embars under the breech or knob of the cascable.

No. 3 lays down his handspike; passes the hook of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to rear; and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right band, time hook between the thumb and forefinger.

 

 

 

 

202                                              MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

The gunner, placing himself at the stock, as at the command LOAD, withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction; causing the trail to be moved by commanding LEFT, or RIGHT, tapping, at the same time, on the right aide of the breech for No. 1 to move the trail to the left, or on the left side of No. 4 to move it to the right.

He then places the centre point of the breech-sight accurately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and com- mands LOWER, or RAISE; tapping, at the same time, on the upper side of the knob of the cascable with the left hand, and drawing out the quoin with the right, in order to elevate, or tapping upwards on the lower side, and shoving in the quoin, in order to depress the piece; rec­tifying the direction, if necessary.

If the piece is to be fired point-blank, horizontally, or at an angle of depression, he does not apply the breech-sight.

If the piece is masked from the object fired at, he places himself astride the stock, or in rear of the trail, and gives the direction by the plummet.

To give the elevation when the piece is masked, or when the desired range is greater than the breech-sight ranges, lie applies the quadrant to the upper surface of the lock-piece, making the allowance due to its inclination with the axis of the piece, which ought to be previously determined.

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left leg, and gives the word READY, making a sig­nal with both hands, at which, Nos. 1, 2, and 4 unbar, and resume their posts; takes the breech-sight with the left hand, and goes to the windward to observe the effect of the shot.

No. 3 inserts the tube in the vent ; drops the handle,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                          203

 

 

allowing the lanyard to uncoil as he steps back to his post, holding it slightly stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up; and breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the left hand against the thigh.

Nos. 1 and 2, on resuming their posts, break off with the feet furthest from the epaulment, inclining well to that side in order to avoid the blast.

 

7.   Number one (or the like)—FIRE.

50.Executed as in No. 25, except that the wheels are not chocked.

What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece.

51.To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY.

 

 

TO UNLOAD.

 

 

52.The piece having been run from battery the in­structor directs No. 2 to take out the shell and cartridge; No. 4 carrying them to their place in rear of the piece. No. 3 assists No. 2, by raising the breech until the shell rolls to the muzzle.

 

 

TO SCRAPE THE PIECE.

 

 

53.In the course of firing, it may become necessary to scrape the piece. To cause this to be done, the in­structor directs the piece to be moved from battery, and then commands:

SCRAPE THE PIECE.

 

Nos. 1 and 2 lay down their handspikes.

 

 

 

 

204                                                MANUALFOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

No. 2 takes the scraper and wiper, giving the latter to No. 1; thoroughly scrapes the chamber and bore draws out the scrapings with the spoon; returns the scraper to its place, and resumes his post.

No. 1, enveloping the sponge-head in the wiper, wipes out the bore, and, returns the wiper to N. 2, who replaces it; puts the sponge upon the props, and resumes his post.

To change posts.

To load for action.

To cease firing.

To secure piece, and replace implements.

To leave the battery.

Executed as in Nos. 28, 29, 30, 31 and 32; No. 4 assisting No. 2 to take off the sleeves.

 

 

TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS.

 

 

Executed as in No. 84.

 

 

TRANSPORTATION.

 

 

54. The transportation of an 8-inch siege howitzer re- quires eight horses and four drivers.

 

 

CHARGES, ETC.

55.

Greatest charge of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .     4lbs.
Greatest charge, shell filled with bullets.  .     3 lbs.
Charge of the shell filled with powder.   .       2 lbs.
9 oz.
Bursting charge of the shell.    .   .   .  .   .       1 lb.
Charge to blow out the fuze.    .   .   .   .   .    
4 oz.
Greatest elevation the carriage admits.   .       150
Greatest depression the carriage admits.  .    100

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                                    205

 

Range at an angle of 10, charge 4lbs.   .   .     430 yards.
Range at an angle of 50, charge 4 lbs.   .   .     1150  “
Range at an angle of 150, charge 4 lbs.   .       2300  “
Proof range of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       300    “
Weight of shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       45 lbs.
Weight of the shell filled with bullets.   .   .    65 lbs.
The black fuze burns to the inch.   .   .   .   .    2 seconds.
The red fuze burns to the inch.   .   .   .   .          3 “
The green fuze burns to the inch.   .   .   .         4 “
The yellow fuze burns to the inch.   .   .   .        5 “

 

 

At 20 elevation, black fuze, full charge

At 30 25’“                red fuze,            “

At 40 25’ “                green fuze,        “

At 50 25’ “                yellow fuze,       “

}

 

 

 

The shell bursts at

{

 

 

500 to 600 yds.

800 to 900 yds.

900 to 1000 yds.

1000 to 1100 yds.

 

A proper charge for enfilading, at the distance of 600 yards, on a horizontal plane, relief of the epaulment seven feet, elevation 20.75,red fuze, is three pounds.

 

 

TO PREPARE AMMUNITION.

 

 

56. If the ammunition for howitzers is to be prepared and issued by the artillery, two men, numbered 5 and 6, are added to each detachment for that purpose. They are sent to the magazine, where they are provided with the following implements and stores:

1 Set of Powder Measures.

1 Funnel.

1 Fuze-mallet

1 Fuze-setter.

1 Fuze .plug-reamer.

1 Rasp.

1 Basket. Containing fuze-plugs.

 

2 Grummet.wads, or

2 Hollow-blocks .

1 Wiper.

}

 

 

On which to place the shells

while putting in the charge

 

 

206                                            MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

1 Budge-barrel.

1 Dark Lantern.

Tow. For stoppers.

Cartridge bags. Of bombazine.

Twine.

Powder.

Musket bullets.

Incendiary composition.

They first fill and tie a number of cartridges, accord­ing to the directions received from the battery, and then prepare a corresponding number of shells.

To fill the cartridges. One holds the bag, while the other (by means of the funnel) pours in the powder. The cartridges thus filled are placed upright in a box until tied, when they are transported to the budge-barrel.

Cartridges of reduced charges for ricochet firing maybe made thus: The charge having been poured into the bag, a wad of hay about six inches in length is placed upon it.     This wad is made by laying wisps of hay evenly to­gether, so as to form a cylinder nearly of the diameter ofthe cartridge bag. The wad is tied about an inch from each end, and the ends are cut squarely on; so as to pre­sent an even surface to the powder. In handling these cartridges, the powder end of the bag should always be kept downwards.

To prepare the shells. No. 5 places one upon a grummet-wad;cleanses it, if necessary, with a rasp ; drives in a fuze-plug until it does not project more than the tenth of an inch; and reams it out with the reamer. No. 6, transferring it to the other grummet-wad, charges it with powder ; puts in a stopper of tow ; marks it with chalk and places it conveniently for No. 4.

If the shell is to be loaded with bullets or incendiary composition, it is charged before the fuze-plug is driven.

 

 

 

 

 

 

          MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                          207

 

It should contain about three hundred and twenty bullets and one pound and a quarter of powder.

If filled only with powder, No. 6 marks the shell with a cross; if with incendiary composition, he makes a circle around the fuze-plug; and if with bullets, he makes two circles on one side. The shells thus differently charged are kept separate.

 

 

LESSON III.

 

Service of a 1O-inch. Siege Mortar.

 

Five men are necessary; one gunner and four other cannoneers.

57.The mortar is upon its platform.

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows:

 

 

HANDSPIKES,

 

 

 

 

 

 

HAVERSACK,

 

 

 

 

 

TUBE-POUCH,         

 

 

 

GUNNERS-POUCH,

 

 

 

 

 

QUADRENT

PLUMMET

POINTNG-CORD

SCRAPER

WIPER

SHELL-HOOKS

TOMPION,

 

 

 

QUOIN,

 

 

POINTING-STAKES

MAUL,

BROOM,

{

 

{

 

{

 

{

 

}

 

{

}

Two on each side of the bed, against the cheeks, leaning upon the fourman-oeuving bolts, the small ends towards the epaulment, those of the front hand-spikes even with the front of the cheeks.

 

 

 

Containing fuzes and a pair of sleeves. Attached to the tompion, and lying upon the mortar.



Containing the priming wire, friction tubes, and the lan­yard, wound in St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle. Attached to the tompion, and lying upon the mortar.

 

Containing the gunner’s level, gim­let, vent-punch, and chalk. Attached to the tompion, and lying upon the mortar.

 

 

 

 

 

 

In a basket between the cheeks of the mortar bed.

 

 

In the muzzle.

 

 

Under the mortar upon the bolster, its handle to the left.

 

 

With the basket.

 

When several mortars are served together, there will be only one gunner’s level, and two vent-punches to each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery there will be one hammer-wrench.

One shell and one paper cartridge bag for instruction, are at the magazine or other safe place in rear of the piece.

58.The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the instructor directs them to place their muskets against the epaulment, and then explains to them the names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the mortar, its bed, and the battery.

59. To cause the pointing-stakes to be established in position, the instructor commands

 

PLANT THE POINTING-STAKES.

 

The gunner, assisted by Nos. 1 and 2, plants the stakes.

No. 1, having driven the pointing-stakes, drives an­other stake one yard behind his post for holding the wiper, and replaces the maul near the basket.

The gunner lays the slack of the pointing-cord at the

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                          209

 

foot of the epaulment, leaving the plummet at the stake in rear of the piece.

All resume their posts.

60. To cause the implements to be distributed, the in-structor commands:

TAKE IMPLEMENTS.

 

The gunner steps to the front of the piece; gives to No. 1 the sleeves and the wiper; to No. 2 the basket and maul; to No. 3 the tube-pouch and broom; and to No. 4 the haversack; equips himself with the gunner’s pouch; applies his level to ascertain the line of metal, which he marks with chalk; and resumes his post.

No. 1 places the wiper upon the stake behind him, and, assisted by No. 3, puts on the sleeves.

No. 2 removes the tompion, which he places with the basket and maul, one yard behind him, and lays the shell-hooks on the ground between himself and the basket.

No. 3 lays the broom on the ground behind him, and equips himself with the tube-pouch.

No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he wears from the right shoulder to the left side.

All take their handspikes.

61. The handspikes are held as in No. 10. When laid down, they are returned, except in one case, to their places on the manoeuvring bolt.

62. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed by the following commands:

 

1. IN BATTERY.

 

The gunner, making a half-face to his right, steps off left foot first, and places himself two paces in rear of the platform, facing the piece.

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing towards the epaulment, em­bar: Nos. I and 2 under the front manoeuvring bolts,

 

 

210                                              MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

and Nos. 3 and 4 under those in the rear, engaging the butts of their handspikes about three inches.

All being ready, the gunner gives the command, HEAVE, which will be repeated as often as may be neces­sary. As soon as the piece is on the middle of the plat­form, he commands HALT. All unbar, and resume their posts.

 

2. Load by detail—LOAD.

 

63.Nos. 1, 3, and 4, lay down their handspikes.

The gunner taking the scraper, places himself in front of the muzzle, and scrapes the bore and chamber; draws out the scrapings with the spoon; returns the scraper to the basket, and again places himself at the muzzle, one yard in its front.

No. 1, turning to his right, takes the wiper with the right band; faces to his left, and places the left foot near the manoeuvring bolt, the right in front of the muzzle, the left hand upon the face of the piece; thoroughly wipes out the chamber and bore, and resumes his post.

No. 3, as soon as the piece is wiped, clears the vent with the priming-wire; sweeps the platform, if necessary, and resumes his post and handspike.

Nos. 2 and 4, facing to their right—No. 2 holding his handspike at the middle under the left arm, butt end foremost, and taking the shell-hooks in the right—go to the rear for a cartridge and shell. While No. 4 is getting the cartridge, No. 2 inserts the shell-hooks in the ears of the shell, and passes the small end of the handspike through the ring. In carrying the shell they hold the handspike with their right hands, No. 4 at the small end and in advance of No. 2. Passing by the left of the piece, between the gunner and the muzzle, they rest the shell upon the platform against the middle of the transom.

 

 

 

 

          MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                          211

 

No. 1, placing the wiper upon the handspike, receives the small end of the handspike from No. 4, who gives the cartridge to the gunner.

The gunner advances the left foot,and places the left hand upon the face of the piece; introduces the cartridge into the mouth of the chamber with the right hand, and carefully pours in the powder; returns the cartridge bag to No. 4, and distributes the powder evenly over the bottom of the chamber. In firing with paper fuzes, he receives one from No. 4, and inserts it in the fuze-plug.

No. 4, returning the cartridge bag to the haversack, takes the wiper.

Nos. 1 and 2 raise the shell and hold it about a foot from the ground, while No. 4 wipes it; they then lift it into the muzzle.

The gunner steps forward, and with the left hand over the handspike, the right hand under and nearer to it, seizes the shell-hooks and assists to lower the shell gently into its place. No. 2 then withdraws his handspike from the ring, and resumes his post. No. 1 takes his handspike. The gunner adjusts the shell so that the fuze is in the axis of the piece; throws the shell-hooks to their place behind No. 2; and, if firing with wooden f’uzes, un­caps the fuze.

No. 4, as soon as he wipes the shell, returns the wiper to its place; takes the slack of the pointing-cord, which he lays over the left manoeuvring bolts, leaving its end at the rear pointing-stake; and resumes his post and hand-spike.

 

3. POINT.

 

64. Nos. 1 and 2, facing towards the epaulment, embar upon the bolster, under and perpendicularly to the piece.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

212                                               MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

The gunner taking the quadrant from the basket, ap­plies it to the left side of the face of’ the piece with the left hand, and inserts or draws out the quoin with the right, giving the command RAISE, or LOWER, until the piece is at the elevation required—usually 45OReturn­ing the quadrant to the basket—Nos. 1 and 2 at the same time unbarring and resuming their posts—he places him­self’ in rear of the rear pointing-stake, and holding the pointing-cord in the left hand and the plummet iii the right, gives the direction; commanding MORTAR LEFT, MORTAR RIGHT; MUZZLE LEFT, MUZZLE RIGHT; TRAIL LEFT, TRAIL RIGHT, as may be required.

 

To throw the mortar to the left. Nos. 2 and 4, facing each other, embar under the manoeuvring bolts. Nos. 1 and 3, facing towards the epaulment, embar under the notches near them. When all are ready, the gunner gives the command, HEAVE STEADY. The cannoneers remain embarred until he gives some other command, or makes the signal to unbar.

To throw the mortar to the right. Nos. 1 and 3 embar under the manoeuvring bolts. Nos. 2 and 4 embar under the notches.

To throw the muzzle to the left. Nos. 1 and 3, facing towards the epaulment, embar under the front notches; No. 1 under the inside of’ the left notch.

To throw the trail to the left. Nos. 1 and 3, facing towards the epaulment, embar under the rear notches; No. 3 under the inside of the left notch.

The muzzle or trail is thrown to the right, in a sim­ilar manner to the preceding, by Nos. 2 and 4.

The direction having been given, the gunner gives the word, READY, and makes a signal with both hands; leaves the plummet at the stake; returns the pointing-cord to

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                        213

 

 

the foot of the epaulment; and goes to the windward to observe the effect of the shot.

Nos. 1, 2, and 4, taking their handspikes with them, go four yards in rear of the platform, and face to the front; No. 4 between Nos. 1 and 2, their handspikes held erect by the right side, the right arm extended naturally.

No. 3 lays down his handspike six inches in his front, parallel to the edge of’ the platform, and makes ready a friction tube, as in No. 24; advancing the right foot, he puts the tube in the vent; rises on the left leg, and moves three paces to the rear in prolongation of the right cheek; faces to the front; holds the handle of the lanyard with the right hand, the lanyard slightly stretched, the cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up; and breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the left hand against the thigh.

Remark.—Todischarge the mortars now in use by means of a friction tube, the lanyard should be passed under a rope attached to and tightly drawn between the rear manoeuvring bolts, or through a loop of rope at­tached to the rear right manoeuvring bolt.

 

4.   Number one (or the like)—FIRE.

 

65. Executed as in No. 25.

On the discharge of the piece, all resume their posts except the gunner, who waits to observe the effect of the shot. As soon as the shot strikes he resumes his post.

What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece, omitting the word “lock.”

66. To continue the exercise, the instructor causes the piece to be moved towards the rear of the platform, di­rects Nos. 2 and. 4 to take out the shell and carry it to the rear, and then resumes the series of commands beginning with In Battery.

 

 

 

 

214                                              MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

TO CHANGE POSTS.  TO LOAD FOR ACTION.  TO CEASE FIRING.

 

Executed as in Nos. 28, 29, and 30, except that in changing posts No. 2 passes by the front of the piece.

 

TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS.

 

67. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having ordered the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be placed as at the command, IN BATTERY, gives the com­mand:

REPLACE IMPLEMENTS.

 

All lay down their handspikes. No. 2 puts in the tompion, and assists No. 1 to pull up the pointing-stakes. The gunner receives the implements from the cannoneers, and replaces them between the cheeks.

 

 

TO LEAVE THE BATTERY.

 

 

Executed as in No. 32.

 

 

TRANSPORTATION.

 

 

68. One mortar wagon is allowed to each 10-inch siege mortar and bed; to transport which requires eight horses and four drivers.

 

 

CHARGES, ETC.

 

69.

Greatest charge of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .     4 lbs.
Ordinary service charge.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   3  “                          
Charge of the shell filled with powder.  .   .    5  “
Bursting charge of the shell.  .   .   .   .   .   .    2  “

Charge to blow out the fuze.   .   .   .   .   .   . 5 oz.

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                         215

 

 

Range, charge 4 lbs., time of flight 21”.   .   .   .   .  2100 yards.

Range, charge 3 lbs., time of flight 19”.   .   .   .   .      1700 “
Range, charge 2 lbs., time of flight 14”.   .   .   .   .      1000 “
Proof range of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   800

Weight of the shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       90 lbs.

 

Five balls, according to their size, are fired from mortars of corresponding calibres. With a charge of one- twenty-fifth of its weight the ball is thrown from six hundred to seven hundred yards.

 

 

TO PREPARE AMMUNITION.

 

 

70.  If the ammunition for mortars is to be prepared and issued by the artillery; two men, numbered 5 and 6, are added to each detachment for that purpose. Their duties at the magazine are similar to those prescribed in No. 56.

Should wooden fuzes be used, in addition to the im­plements therein mentioned, a fuze-saw will be required for reducing the fuzes to the proper lengths. The shell being first charged, the fuze, cut at the right length, is then driven.

The paper fuze is marked with the number of seconds which it burns per inch. It may be cut with a knife to any desired length.

 

 

TIME OF FLIGHT.

 

71.  The time of flight for siege mortars, at an elevation of 450, with ordinary charges, is nearly equal to the square root of the range in feet divided by four.

The experimental length of the fuze may be given according to this rule.

 

 

 

 

210                                                 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

TO ASCERTAIN THE DISTANCE BYTHE REPORT OF FIRE-ARMS.

 

 

72.Multiply the number of seconds which elapse be­tween seeing the flash and hearing the report by 1,100; the product will be nearly the distance in feet.

 

 

RAPIDITY OF FIRING.

 

 

72.Siege mortars can be fired conveniently at the rate of twelve rounds an hour continuously ; but they may in case of need, be fired with greater rapidity.

 

 

LESSON IV.

 

Service of an 8-inch Siege Mortar.

 

Three men are necessary: one gunner and two other cannoneers.

74.The mortar is upon its platform.

The implements, etc., omitting two handspikes, and addIng one grummet-wad, are the same as prescribed for the 10-inch siege mortar in No. 57.They are arranged as prescribed in that number. The wad is in the basket.

75.The instruction for this piece is the same as that prescribed in Lesson 111., with the following modifica­tions:

At the command TAKE IMPLEMENTS, No. 1 performs the duties enjoined on No. 3, and No. 2 those of No. 1, each in addition to his own. No. 2 assists No. 1 to put on the sleeves, and places the wad on the platform in front of the transom.

70.At the command IN BATTERY, No. 1 embars under the right front manoeuvring bolts. No. 2 embars under the left rear manoeuvring bolts.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                        217

 

77.At the command LOAD, No. 1, having wiped out the mortar, places the wiper upon the stake; pricks; and, if necessary, sweeps the platform.

No. 2, laying down his handspike, goes for a cartridge and shell; carries the shell in the right arm; passes be­tween the gunner and the muzzle, and places it on the wad; gives to the gunner the cartridge, and if firing with paper fuzes, a fuze and takes the wiper from the stake.

The gunner, on returning trio scraper to the basket, takes the shell-hooks and lays them on the ground be­tween himself and the muzzle, having carefully poured in the powder, he returns the cartridge-bag to No. 2, and distributes the powder evenly over the bottom of the chamber; puts the fuze in the fuze-plug; inserts the husks in the ears of’ the shell ; raises it about a foot from the ground and holds it, while No. 2 wipes it; and then places it in the bore.

No. 2 replaces the wiper upon the stake; lays the slack of the pointing-cord over the left manoeuvring bolts; and resumes his post.

78.At the command POINT, Nos. 1 and 2 embar under either of the front or rear notches, as required. At the signal from the gunner, No. 1 prepares to fire the piece, as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 64.

 

 

TRANSPORTATION.

 

 

49.One mortar wagon will carry three 8-inch siege mortars, with their beds; to transport which requires eight horses and four drivers.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

218                                               MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

CHARGES, ETC.

8O.

Greatest charge of powder.   .   .   .   .   .         2 lbs.
Ordinary service charge.   .   .   .   .   .   .         1 lb. 12 Oz.
Charge of the shell filled with powder.   .       2 lbs. 9 oz.
Bursting charge of the shell.   .   .   .   .   .       1 lb.
Charge to blow out the fuze.   .   .   .   .   .       4 oz.

Range, charge 2 lbs., time of flight 20”.   .      1,837 yards.
Range, charge 14 lb., time of flight 14”.   .      943      “
Proof range of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       300     

Weight of shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .        45 lbs.

 

 

 

LESSON V.

 

Service of a Coehorn Mortar.

 

Three men are necessary: one gunner and two other cannoneers.

81.The mortar is upon its platform.

The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the same as prescribed for the 8-inch siege mortar in No. 74. A 24-pdr. shell is used.

82.The instruction for this piece is the same as that prescribed in Lesson IV.

To prepare its ammunition, and to transport it by hand with ease, two additional men are required. The gunner carries the basket and implements.

83.It is fired either from behind intrenchments, like other mortars, or it may accompany troops in effecting lodgments in towns and fortified places.

84.As the shell is without ears, it should be strapped with tin, having loops attached, through which a cord is passed for the purpose of lowering it into the bore. The chamber being cylindrical, a sponge is used, which is handled by No. 1.

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAYY ARTILLERY.                                          219

 

 

CHARGES, ETC.

85.

Greatest charge of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .           8 oz.

Charge of the shell filled with powder.   .   .   .   .       . 1 lb.

Bursting charge of the shell .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .    . 8 oz.

Charge to blow out the fuze .  .   .     .   .   .   .   .   .  .   2 oz.

Range, charge 8 oz.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  1,200 yards.

Range, charge 6 oz.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .         900  “
Range, charge 4 oz.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .         430  “
Proof range of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       300 

Weight of shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  17 lbs.

 

 

LESSON VI.

 

Service of a 10-inch Sea-Coast  Mortar.

 

Five menare necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers.

 

80. The mortar is upon its platform.

The implements, etc., with the addition of one sponge, are the same as prescribed for the 1O.inch siege mortar in No. 57. They are arranged as prescribed in that number, except that the sponge is placed upon props one yard behind No. I, the sponge-head turned towards the epaulment.

87. The instruction for this piece is the same as that prescribe. in Lesson III., with the following modifications:

No. 1, after wiping the bore, sponges out the cham­ber; for this purpose mounting upon the right cheek and bolster.

To scrape the bore, and to put in the cartridge and shell, the gunner mounts upon a block in front of the muzzle.

The cartridge—its bag being of bombazine or flannel—is put directly into the chamber by the gunner, and rammed by No. 1.

 

 

 

 

 

220                                            MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

To lift the shell into the muzzle, Nos. 2 and 3 mount the cheeks, and are assisted respectively by the gunner and No. 1.

In giving the elevation, Nos. 1 and 2 are assisted by Nos. 3 and 4.

Before priming, No. 3 pricks a second time.

 

 

CHARGES, ETC.

88.

Greatest charge of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .    .   .        10 lbs.
Charge of shell filled with powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   . 5  “

Bursting charge of the shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .    .  2  “                    

Charge to blow out the fuze.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   5 oz.

Range, charge 10 lbs., time of flight 36”.   .   .   .4,250 yards.
Proof range of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   300“
Weight of shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .    90 lbs.

 

 

LESSON VII.

 

Service of a 18-inch Sea-coast Mortar.

 

Five men are necessary one gunner and four other cannoneers.

89. The mortar is upon its platform.

The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the same as prescribed for the 10-inch seacoast mortar in No. 86.

90. The instruction for this piece differs in no respect fromthat prescribed in Lesson VI.

 

CHARGES, ETC.

 

91.

Greatest charge of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .     20 lbs.
Charge of the shell filled with powder.   .   .   11 “
Bursting charge of the shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   6 “

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                          221

 

Chargeto blow out the fuze.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .6 oz.

Range, charge 20 lbs., time of flight (about) 40”.   .     4,325 yards.

Proof range of powder            .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .300 “
Weight of shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .    200 lbs.

 

 

 

LESSON VIII.

 

Service of a Stone Mortar.

 

Five men arc necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers.

92.The mortar is upon its platform.

The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the same as prescribed for the 10-inch sea-coast mortar in No. 80.

93.The instruction for this piece differs in no respect from that prescribed in Lesson VI.

A wooden bottom is placed over the mouth of the chamber to receive the basket which contains the charge of stones.

 

 

 

CHARGES, ETC.

 

94.With a charge of a pound and a half of powder, and one hundred and twenty pounds of stones, at an elevation of 600, the stones are thrown from one hundred and fifty to two hundred and fifty yards.

With fifteen 6-pdr. shells, fuze fifteen seconds, charge of powder one pound, elevation 330, the shell may be thrown from fifty to one hundred and fifty yards.

95.As the shells are liable to burst on leaving the bore, the piece is fired by a slow match applied to a train of quick match, giving the men time to place themselves under cover.

 

 

222                                              MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

LESSON IX.

 

Service of a Gun mounted on a Barbette Carriage.

 

Remark.—The Instruction for a barbette gun, although in many respects precisely the same as that for a siege gun, is given in full, because the siege gun is seldom found in the forts on the sea-board.

 

Five men are necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers.

90. The piece is in battery.

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows:

 

HANDSPIKES,

 

 

 

 

 

 

SPONGE -RAMMER,

 

 

 

 

 

PASS-BOX,

 

 

 

TUBE-POUCH, .        

 

 

GUNNERS-POUCH,

 

 

{

 

{

 

{

 

{

 

{

 

 

 

Two on each side of the carriage leaning against the parapet, in line with the cannoneers.

 

 

One yard behind the cannoneers of the right, the sponge uppermost, the sponge andrammer-heads turned from the parapet, inclined slightly from the piece, and supported upon a prop; or when this cannot be done conveniently, placed against the wall, the sponge and rammer heads nearest the piece.

 

 

Against the parapet, outside of the pile of balls.

 

Containing friction tubes, and the lan­yard,  wound in St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle. Suspended from theknob of the cascable.

 

Containing the gunner’s level, breech sight, fingerstall, priming wire, gim­let, vent-punch, and chalk. Sus­pended from the knob of the cascable.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                          223

 

 

 

CHOCKS,

 

 

VENT-COVER,

 

TOMPION,

 

 

BROOM,

 

 

BUDGE-BARREL

 

{

 

 

 

 

 

{

{

 

One on each side of the piece, at the foot of the parapet, insides the handspikes.

 

 

Covering the vent.

 

In the muzzle.

 

Leaning against the parapet, out­side of the pile of balls.

 

Containing cartridges, at the safest and most convenient place in rear of the piece.

 

 

When several guns are served together, there will be only one gunner’s level and two vent-punches to each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery there will be one worm, one ladle, and one wrench.

The balls are regularly piled on the banquette, on the left of the piece.

The wads are placed between the parapet and the balls, partly resting on them.

97. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the gun, its carriage, and the battery.

98. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor commands:

 

TAKE IMPLEMENTS.

 

The gunner mounts upon the tongue; takes off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the para­pet, outside of the pass-box; gives the tube-pouch to No. 3; equips himself with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the latter on the second finger of the left hand; levels the piece by the elevating screw; applies his level to ascertain the line of metal, which, with the assistance of No. 2, he marks with the chalk-line; and resumes his post.

 

 

 

 

224                                             MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch.

Nos. 1 and 2, after passing handspikes to Nos. 3 and 4, take each one for himself.

99. The handspike is held in both hands; the hand nearest to the parapet grasping it near the small end and at the height of the shoulder, back of the hand down, elbow touching the body; the other hand back up, the arm extended naturally; the butt of the handspike upon the ground on the side furthest from the parapet, and six inches in advance of the alignment.

100. When the cannoneer lays down his handspike, he places it directly before him, about six inches in advance of, and parallel to the alignment, the small end towards the parapet; and whenever he thus lays it down for the performance of any particular duty, he will resume it on returning to his post after the completion of that duty.

101. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed by the following commands:

 

1. FROM BATTERY.

 

 

The gunner moves two paces to his right.

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing from the parapet, embar, near the tire; Nos. 1 and 2 first facing the chocks on the rails in front of the rollers through the front spokes of’ the wheels, over the front manoeuvring bolts; and Nos. 3 and 4 through the rear spokes, under the rear ma­noeuvring bolts.

Should there be no rear manoeuvring bolts, Nos. 3 and 4 embar under the braces, near the manoeuvring staples.

All being ready, the gunner gives the command HEAVE, which will be repeated as often as may be necessary. As soon as the face of the piece is about one yard from the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                          225

 

parapet, he commands HALT. All unbar, and resume their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the rollers.

 

2. Load by Detail—LOAD.

 

102.        Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 lay down their handspikes.

No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the vent-cover.

No. 1 faces once and a half to his left; steps over the sponge and rammer; faces the piece; takes the sponge with both hands, the backs down, the right hand three feet from the sponge-head, the left hand eighteen inches nearer to it; returns to the piece, placing the left foot on the rail of the chassis in line with the face of the piece, the right in the most convenient position; and rests the end of the sponge in the muzzle, the staff in the prolonga­tion of the bore, supported by the right hand, the right arm extended, the left hand flat against the side of the thigh.

 

Remark.—Inorder that Nos. 1 and 2 may load with facility with­out standing on the chassis, a banquette should be placed between the head of the chassis and the watt, or a platform attached to the head of the chassis:

 

No. 2 steps upon the rail on his side, and occupies a position on the left of the piece corresponding to that of No. 1 on its right, he seizes the staff with the left hand, back down, near to and outside of the hand of No.1.

No. 3, as soon as the sponge is inserted in the bore, steps over the rammer and seizes the staff with both hands, as prescribed for the sponge; returns to his post; and stands ready to exchange with No. 1.

No. 4 takes the pass-box and goes to the rear for a cartridge; returns with it, and places himself; facing the piece, about eighteen inches to the rear and right of No. 2.

 

 

 

 

 

226                                                  MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

The gunner mounts upon the tongue of the chassis, placing the left foot about six inches from the rear tran­som of the gun carriage, and breaks well to the rear with the right foot, the toe to the right; closes the vent with the second finger of the left hand, bonding well forward to cover himself by the breech; and turns the elevating screw with the right hand, so as to adjust the piece con­veniently for loading.

103. In the mean time, Nos. 1 and 2 insert the sponge by the following motions:

First motion.—.They insert the sponge as far as the hand of No. 1, bodies erect, shoulders square.

Second motion.—They slide the hands along the staff and seize it at arm’s length.

Third motion.—They force the sponge down as pre­scribed in the first motion.

Fourth motion.—Theyrepeat the second motion.

Fifth motion.—Theypush the sponge to the bottom of the bore. No. 1 replaces the left hand on the staff back up, six inches nearer to the muzzle than the right. No. 2 places the right hand, back up, between the hands of No. 1.

If in executing these motions, or the corresponding ones with the rammer, it be found that the sponge or rammer is at home at the third or fourth motion, then what is prescribed for the fifth motion, will be performed at the third or fourth. The knee on the side towards which the body is to be inclined is always bent, the other straightened; and the weight of the body added, as much as possible, to the effort exerted by the arms.

 

3. SPONGE.

 

104. Nos. 1 and 2, pressing the sponge firmly against the bottom of the bore, turn it three times from right to

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                            227

 

left, and three times from left to right; replace the hands on the thighs; and withdraw the sponge by motions con­trary to those prescribed for inserting it.

Remark.—To handle the sponge when it is new and fits tight, it may become necessary for Nos. 1 and 2 to use both hands. In this case it will be inserted and withdrawn by short and quick motions.

 

No. 2 quits the staff and turning towards No. 4, re­ceives from him the cartridge, which he takes in both hands, back down, and introduces into the bore bottom foremost, seams to the sides; he then grasps the rammer in the way prescribed for the sponge.

No. 1, rising upon the right leg and turning towards his left, passes the sponge above the rammer with the left hand to No. 3, and receiving the rammer with the right, presents it as prescribed for the sponge, except that he rests the rammer-head against the right side of the face of the piece.

No. 3, as soon as the sponge is withdrawn, passing the rammer under the sponge with the right hand, re­ceives the sponge from No. 1 with the left, replaces it upon the prop, and resumes his post.

No. 4, setting down the pass-box, takes out the car­tridge and presents it in both hands to No. 2, the choke to the front; returns the pass-box to its place; and picks up a ball, and afterwards a wad, should one be re­quired.

Nos. 1 and 2 force down the cartridge by the motions prescribed for forcing down the sponge.

 

4. RAM.

 

105. Nos. 1 and 2, drawing the rammer out to the full extent of their arms, ram with a single stroke. No. 2 quits the staff and turning towards No. 4, receives from him the ball and wad, while No. 1 throws out the ram-

 

 

 

 

 

228                                         MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLIERY.

 

mer, and holds the head against the right side of the face of the piece. No. 2, receiving successively the ball and wad, introduces them into the bore, the ball first, and seizes the staff with the left hand. No. 4 then resume his post.

Nos. 1 and 2 force down the ball and wad together by the same motions, and ram in the same manner as prescribed for the cartridge. No. 2 quits the rammer; sweeps, if necessary, the platform on his own side; passes the broom to No. 1; and resumes his post. No. 1 throws out the rammer, and places it upon the prop below the sponge; finishes the sweeping; and resumes his post.

The gunner pricks, leaving the priming wire in the vent, and, if firing beyond point-blank range, adjusts the breech-sight to the distance.

 

5. IN BATTERY.

 

106. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the rollers, and with Nos.

3 and 4, all facing towards the parapet, embar; Nos. 1 and 2 through the front spokes of’ the wheels, near the tire, under the manoeuvring bolts; and Nos. 3and 4 under the braces, near the manoenvring staples.

AU. being ready, the gunner commands HEAVE, and the piece is run into battery ; the gunner following up the movement. As soon as the rollers touch the hurters, he commands HALT. All unbar, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 resume their posts.

6. POINT.

 

107. No. 3 lays down his handspike; passes the hook of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to rear; and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right hand, the hook between the thumb and forefinger.

Nos. 1 and 4 go to the traverse wheels, and, facing towards the parapet, embar under the fork-bolts or under

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                                          229

 

 

the wheels. No. 1, in passing from and to his post, moves on the outside of No. 3.

The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction, causing the trail to be moved by commanding LEFT, or RIGHT, tapping, at the same time, on the right side of the breech for No. 1 to move the chassis to the left, or on the left side for No. 4 to move it to the right.

He then places the centre point of the breech-sight accurately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and by the elevating screw gives the proper elevation, rectifying the direction, if necessary.

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left leg, and gives the word READY, making a signal with both hands, at which Nos. 1 and 4 unbar, and resume their posts ; takes the breech—sight with the left hand, and receiving the tube from No. 3, inserts it in the vent ; dismounts from the tongue ; and goes to the wind­ward to observe the effect of the shot.

No. 3 drops the handle, allowing the lanyard to un— coil as he steps back to his post, holding it slightly stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between the fingers, buck of the hand up, and breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the left hand against the thigh.

At the word, READY, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, and, breaking off with the feet farthest from the parapet, stand ready to chock the rollers.

108. In directing the piece to be fired, the instructor will designate it by its number, as, for example:

 

7. Number one—FIRE.

 

No. 3 gives a smart pull upon the lanyard.

Immediately after the discharge of the piece, Nos. 1 and 2 chock the rollers, and resume the erect position.

 

 

 

 

230                                              MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

No. 8 resumes the erect position, and rewinds the lanyard in St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle, returning it, if dry, to the tube-pouch. The gunner, having observed the ef­fect of the shot, returns to his post.

109. Whenever the piece is to be fired by a lock, port-fire, or slowmatch, it will be done by No. 8, as prescribed for No. 4, in the instruction for field artillery.

110. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY.

 

 

TO CHANGE POSTS.

 

111. To change posts, the instructor commands:

1. change posts. 2. March. 3. Call off.

 

At the first command, the cannoneers lay down their handspikes.; place their equipments on the parts of the carriage nearest to them; and face to their left.

At the second command, they step off, each advancing one post; No. 2 taking that of No. 1. Nos. 2 and 3 pass to the rear of the chassis; No. 2 on the outside of all the cannoneers. On arriving at their posts, they face to the piece, and equip themselves.

At the third command, they call off according to the posts they are to occupy.

 

TO LOAD FOR ACTION.

 

112. The cannoneers having been sufficiently instructed in the details of the movements, the instructor commands

Load for action—LOAD.

The piece is run from battery, loaded, run into bat­tery, pointed, and prepared for firing, by the following commands from the gunner: FROM BATTERY—LOAD—-IN BATTERY—POINT—READY.

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                        231

 

At the command, or signal, fromthe instructor to commence firing, the gunner gives the command, FIRE, and continues the action until the instructor directs the firing to cease.

 

TO CEASE FIRING.

 

113. To cause the firing to cease, the instructor com­mands:

CEASE FIRING.

 

Whether the cannoneers are loading by detail or for action, the piece is sponged out, and all resume their posts. If the cartridge has been inserted the loading will be com­pleted, unless the instructor should otherwise direct.

 

TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS.

 

114. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having ordered, the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be run into battery, gives the following commands:

 

1. SECURE PIECE.

 

No. 2 returns the tompion to the muzzle. The gunner puts on the vent cover, which he receives from No. 2, and depresses the piece.

 

2. REPLACE IMPLEMENTS.

 

Nos. I and 2 replace the handspikes against the para­pet, Nos. 3 and 4 passing theirs to them for that purpose. The gunner hangs the pouches upon the knob of the cas­cable.

 

TO LEAVE THE BATTERY.

 

115. The instructor forms the detachment in rear of the piece, and marches it from the battery as prescribed in No. 12.

 

 

 

 

232                                            MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS.

 

Executed as in No. 34.

 

CHARGES, ETC.

      Wads.

     Rapidity of firing.

     Penetration of shot.

See Nos. 37, 39, and 40.

 

LESSON XII.

 

Service of a Gun mounted on a Casemate Carriage.

 

Five men are necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers.

120.  The piece is in battery.

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows:

 

 

TRUCK-HAND- SPIKES, . .

 

 

 

 

ELEVATING-HAND- SPIKES, ,

 

 

 

 

TRAVERSING- HANDSPIKES,.

 

 

 

 

ROLLER-HAND- SPIKE,.       

{

{

{

{

 

 

One on each side of the carriage; leaning against the wall, in line with the cannoneers.

 

 

 

One on each side of the carriage, leaning against the wall, behind Nos. 3 and 4*

 

 

One on each side of the carriage, leaning against the wall, opposite to the end of the tongue.

 

 

Leaning against the wall, behind the  gunner, or laid down in the align­ment on his right.

 

 

·           These are manoeuvring handspikes. With two pieces in one casemate, or where the pieces are not separated by piers, they may be placed against the nearest wall, or laid down in the most convenient position.

 

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                         233

 

 

 

SPONGE-RAMMER

 

 

PASS-BOX, .

 

 

 

TUBE-POUCH

 

 

 

GUNNER’S-POUCH,

 

 

 

 

CHOCKS, . .    

 

 

VENT-COVER,

 

TOMPION

 

 

BROOM,

 

 

           

BUDGE-BARREL,

{

 

{

{

{

 

{

{

 

About one yard behind the cannoneers of the right, the sponge uppermost, the sponge and rammer-heads turned from the embrasure, inclined slight­ly from the piece, and supported upon a proper block.

 

Behind No. 4.

 

 

Containing friction tubes, and the lan­yard, wound in St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle. Suspended from the knob of the cascable.

 

 

Containing the gunner’s level, breech­{ sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gimlet, vent-punch, chalk-line, and chalk. Suspended from the knob of the cas­cable.

 

One on each side of’ the carriage, on the front transom of the chassis, handles outwards.

 

 

Covering the vent.

 

In the muzzle.

 

 

Leaning against the scarp-wall, on the left of the piece.

 

 

Containing cartridges, at the safest and most convenient place in rear of the piece.

 

 

When several guns are served together, there will be only one gunner’s level and two vent-punches to each bat­tery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery there will be one worm, one ladle, and one wrench.

The balls are regularly piled against the wall, behind No.2.

 

 

 

234                                                 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

The wads are placed between the wall and the balls, partly resting on them.

121. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, th9 instructor explains to them the names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the gun, its carriage, and the battery.

122. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor commands:

TAKE IMPLEMENTS.

 

The gunner mounts upon the tongue; takes off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the scarp; gives the tube-pouch to No. 3; and equips him­self with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the latter on the second finger of the loft hand. With the as­sistance of No. 3 he levels tile piece, and applies his level to ascertain the line of metal, which, with the assistance of No. 2, he marks with the chalk line. (If the gun has permanent sights, this is only necessary for instruction, or for verifying the sight.) He then takes the roller-­handspike, and resumes his post. This handspike is held vertically with the right hand, the lower end upon the ground iii line with the toes, the arms extended naturally.

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch.

Nos. 1 and 2 take the truck-handspikes with the hand farthest from the wall, and carry them to that side, hold­ing them vertically, the lower end upon the ground in line with the toes, the arms extended naturally.

123. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed by the following commands:

 

1. FROM BATTERY.

 

The gunner embars in the left mortise of the roller: Nos. 1 and 2, facing from the scarp wall, embar in the most convenient front mortises of the truck-wheels,

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                       235

 

the hand farthest from the carriage at the top of the hand­spike, the other hand eight inches lower.

Nos. 3 and 4 go to the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, and, facing towards them, seize the handspikes with both hands between those of Nos. 1 and 2.

Nos. 1, 2, 8, and 4 in applying themselves to the car­riage either to run it from or to battery, break to the rear with the foot nearest to the carriage.

All being ready, the gunner presses the roller under the rear transom of the gun carriage, by bearing down upon his handspike, and gives the command, HEAVE.

Nos. 1, 2, 8, and 4 act together, and bear upon the handspikes until they are nearly down to the rails. The gunnerthen disengages the roller from under the transom by raising his handspike, and commands, UNBAR. Nos. 1 and 2 let go the handspikes with the hand nearest to the the carriage, and chock the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 with­draw the handspikes and pass them to Nos. 1 and 2, who re-insert them in the front mortises.

The gunner again bearing down upon his handspike, gives the command, HEAVE, and so on, until the face of the piece is about one yard from the wall, when, raising his handspike, lie commands, HALT, and shifts it into the right mortise of the roller. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels, and replace their handspikes against the wall. All resume their posts.

2. Load by detail—LOAD.

124. Executed as in Nos. 103 and 104, with the fol­lowing modification: No. 3, facing towards the scarp, embars under the breech, and maintains the piece in a convenient position for inserting the sponge, until he receives a signal from the gunner to unbar.

3. SPONGE.

 

125. Executed as in No. 104.

 

 

 

 

 

236                                                  MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

4. RAM.

 

126. Executed as in No. 105.

 

5. IN BATTERY.

 

127. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and, facing from the scarp wall apply their hands to the front of the cheeks.

Nos. 3 and 4, facing towards the scarp wall, lay hold of the handles.

The gunner bears down carefully upon the roller handspike, and the piece is run into battery. As soon as the wheels touch the hurters; he commands, HALT. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 resume their posts.

6. POINT.

 

128. Nos. 1 and 4 take the traversing handspikes, and, facing towards the scarp wall, embar under the ends of the rear transom of the chassis. No. 1, in passing to and from his post, moves on the outside of No. 3.

When the elevation is given by the quoin, No. 2 takes an elevating handspike and embars upon the left check under the re-inforce.

The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction, as in No. 107.

I-he then applies the breech sight, if necessary, and points the piece; commanding LOWER, or RAISE, tapping at the same time on the upper side of the knob of the cascable with the left hand, and drawing out the quoin with the right, in order to elevate, or tapping upwards on the lower side and shoving in the quoin, in order to de­press the piece.

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left leg, and gives the word, READY, making a sig­nal with both hands, at which Nos. 1, 2, and 4 unbar, re­place their handspikes, and resume their posts; takes the

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                       237

 

breech-sight with the left hand, the roller-handspike with the right, and disposes himself to observe the effect of the shot.

If the elevation is given by a screw, No. 3 turns its handle by direction of the gunner.

No. 3, having passed the hook of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to rear, inserts it in the vent, and stretches the lanyard as in No. 107.

At the word, READY, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, and breaking off with the feet farthest from the wall, stand ready to chock the wheels.

 

7.   Number one (or the like)—FIRE.

 

129.  Executed as in No. 108.

What is prescribed in No. 109 will apply to this

 

130.  To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY:

To change posts.

To load for action.

To cease firing.

To secure piece, and replace implements.

Executed as in Nos. 11, 112, 113, and 115.

 

TO LEAVE THE BATTERY.

 

131.  The instructor forms the detachment in rear of the piece, and marches it from the battery as prescribed in No. 12.

132.  Remark—The service of a gun mounted on a ease-mate carriage of the old pattern, (which is without the eccentric roller,) will require the following modification: The roller-handspike is dispensed with, and the gunner, dt the command, FROM BATTERY, moves two paces to the right.

 

 

 

238                                            MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS.

 

Executed as in No. 84.

 

CHARGES, ETC.

 

133. The ordinary service charge of powder for heavy guns is one-fourth the weight of the shot. For firing double shot it is one-sixth that weight.

 

Range of a 42-pdr., at an elevation of 10 30’, charge

       1O ½  lbs.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       .   .  860 yards.

Range of a 42-pdr., at an elevation of 50, charge

       10 ½  lbs.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  1,955  “

Range of a 32.pdr., at an elevation of 10 30’, charge

       8lbs.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   . 800  “

Range of a 32-pdr., at an elevation of 50, charge 8 lbs.   .   .  1,022

Proof range of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .    300
Greatest elevation the carriage admits.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .     80
Greatest depression the carriage admits.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  40

 

   Wads.

   Rapidity of firing.

   Penetration of shot.

See Nos. 37 39, and 40.

 

 

LESSON XIII.

 

Service of an 8-inch Columbiad mounted on a Casemate Carriage.

 

 

Five men are necessary one gunner and four other cannoneers.

134. The piece is in battery.

The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the same as prescribed for the casemate gun in No. 120, substituting haversack—worn by No. 4 from the right shoul­der to the left side—for pass-box.

 

 

 

          MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                         239

 

The shells are at the magazine, or other safe position, and are brought, as required, to the place prescribed for the budge-barrel.

135. The instruction for this piece differs in no ma­terial respect from that prescribed in Lesson XII.

It is loaded with shell, which is attached to a sabot. The shell is brought up by No. 4 together with the car­tridge, and, is set home in the same manner as the ball, ex­cept that it is not rammed.

 

CHARGES, ETC.

 

136.

Greatest charge of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   . 10 lbs.

Charge of the shell filled with powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  2 lbs. 9 oz.
Bursting charge of the shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  1 lb.
Charge to blow out the fuze.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   4 oz.

 

Range at an angle of 10, charge 10 lbs.

Range at an angle of 50, charge 10 lbs

}

 

Axis of the piece 16 feet above

the water

{

 

 919 yards.

1,813 “

 

Proof range of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       300 “ Weight of shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .                    50 lbs.

 

 

LESSON XIV.

 

Service of a 24-pdr. Howitzer mounted on a Flank Casemate Carriage.

 

Three men are necessary: one gunner and two other cannoneers.

137. The piece is in battery.

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows:

 

ROLLER-HAND-

   SPIKE, ..

 

SPONGE& RAM-

   MER,.          .

{

{

 

Leaning against the scarp wall, behind No.2.

 

Leaning against the scarp wall, behind No. 1, the rammer-head on the ground.

         

 

 

240                                                                       MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

 

 

 

HAVERSACK,

 

 

 

 

TUBE-POUCH, .

 

 

 

VENT-COVER,

TOMPION

BROOM, . .  .

 

 

 

BUDGE-BARREL,         

{

{

 

{

 

Suspended from the knob of the cascable.

 

Containing the finger-stall, priming-wire, friction tubes, and the lanyard, wound in St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle. Suspended from the knob of the cascable.

 

Covering the vent.

In the muzzle.

On the left of the piece.

 

 

Containing cartridges, at the safest and most convenient place in rear of the piece.

 

The rounds of canister are arranged against the scarp wall, behind No. 2. The shells, if used, are at the maga­zine, or other safe position, and are brought, as required, to the place prescribed for the budge-barrel.

138. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the howitzer, its carriage, and the battery.

139. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor commands:

 

TAKE IMPLEMENTS.

 

The gunner takes the priming-wire and finger-stall, wearing the latter on the second finger of the right hand gives the tube-pouch to No. 1, and the haversack to No. 2; takes off the vent-cover and places it against the scarp wall outside of the canisters; seizes the roller-handspike with the right hand, and resumes his post; holding the handspike vertically on the right side, its lower end in line with the toes, the arm extended naturally.

No. 1 equips himself with the tube-pouch.

 

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                         241

 

No. 2 equips himself with the haversack, which he wears from the right shoulder to the left side.

140. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed by the following commands:

 

1. FROM BATTERY.

 

The gunner, embarring on the left mortise, presses the roller under the rear transom, and seizes the left handle with the left hand.

Nos. 1 and 2 lay hold of the manoeuvring rings and handles.

All being ready, the gunner gives the command, HEAVE, and the carriage is run to the rear until the face of the piece is about one yard from the wall, when, dis­engaging the roller, he commands, HALT. All resume their posts.

 

2. Load by detail—LOAD.

 

141. The gunner places himself at the breech; breaks the rear with the right foot; closes the vent with the second finger of the right hand; and manages the elevat­ing screw with the left.

No. 1 seizing the sponge-staff at its middle, brings it across his body; plants the left foot opposite to the muz­zle, close to the carriage, and breaks off with the right foot ; at the same time throwing the sponge staff into the left hand, back down, and extending both hands towards the ends of the staff, so as to enter the rammer-head into the embrasure and bring the sponge opposite to the muzzle. He then inserts it, and presses it to the bottom of the chamber with three motions.

No. 2 goes for a cartridge, and returns to his post. If shells are used, he brings a shell at the same time.

 

3. SPONGE

 

142. No. 1, using both hands, sponges the chamber

 

 

 

242                                                    MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

carefully; withdraws the sponge, pressing it against the bottom of the bore; turns it over, stepping to his left for this purpose, and rests the rammer-head against the right side of the face of the piece.

No. 2 introduces the cartridge, bottom foremost, seams downward. No. 1 sets it home by three motions, with the right hand.

 

4. RAM.

 

143. No. 1, drawing out the rammer to the full ex­tent of his arm, rams once, and throws out the rammer, holding it as before, the rammer-head against the right side of the face of the piece.

No. 2 introduces the canister or shell home with care; throws out the rammer; replaces it; and resumes his post.

The gunner, rising upon the left leg, pricks, leaving the priming-wire in the vent, and resumes his post.

 

5. IN BATTERY.

 

144. All apply themselves to the carriage, as pre­scribed in No. 140, and ease the piece into battery. As soon as it touches the hurters, the gunner commands, HALT. All resume their posts.

 

6. POINT.

 

145. No. 1 makes ready a tube, as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 24.

No. 2 goes to the rear of the chassis, and, facing to the front, applies himself to it by hand, in order to tra­verse it.

The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, having pointed the piece, gives the word, READY, making a signal with both hands, at which No. 2 resumes his post; takes out the roller-handspike, and resumes his post.

No. 1 steps to the vent and inserts the tube, holding

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                        243

 

 

the lanyard slightly stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up, and breaks to his rear a full pace with the left foot, the left hand against the thigh.

 

7.   Number one (or the like)—FIRE.

 

146. No. 1 fires as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 25.

What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece, substituting No. 1 for No. 3.

 

147. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY.

To change posts.

To load for action.

To cease firing.

To secure piece, and replace implements.

To leave the battery.

 

Executed as in Nos. 111, 112, 1]3, 114, and 115.

CHARGES, ETC.

148

Charge of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .       2 lbs.
Range at an angle of 00, charge 2 lbs., shell.   .   .   .   .   .       205 yards.

Range at an angle of 10, charge 2 lbs.) shell.   .   .   .   .   .       516   “

Range at an angle of 50, charge 2 lbs., shell.   .   .   .   .   .    1,322   “

Range at an angle of 20, charge 1 ¾  lbs., spherical-case,

       time 2”.   .    .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  600 “

Range at an angle of 5O 30’, charge 1~ lbs., spher.-case,

       time 4”.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .     1050 “

Range at an angle of 30 30’, charge 2 lbs., spher.-case,

       time 3”.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .        880

Proof range of powder.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .    300

Weight of the 24.pdr. shell.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .     17 lbs.

Weight of the round of canister.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .  21  “

No. of bullets in a round of canister.   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   .   48  “

 

 

 

 

244                                            MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

                      LESSON XV.

 

Service of an 8-inch Columbiad, mounted on a Columbiad

Carriage.

 

Five men are necessary: one gunner and four other cannoneers.

149.  The piece is in battery.

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows:

 

 

 

TRUCK-HAND-

SPIKES, .     .

 

 

 

 

MANEUVRING-

HANDSPIKES,

 

 

 

ELEVATING-BAR,

 

 

 

 

SPONGE-RAMMER,

 

 

 

 

HAVERSACK,

 

 

 

TUBE-POUCH,

{

{

{

{

 

{

{

 

 

Two on each side of the carriage, laid on the rails, one in rear of each fronttruck-wheel, and one in rear of each rear truck-wheel.

 

 

One on each side of the carriage, laid on the ground in a line with the can­noneers, opposite to the traverse wheels, the small ends towards the parapet.

 

Laid across the ties at the junction of the braces, handle to the left.

 

One yard behind the cannoneers of the right, the sponge uppermost, the sponge and rammer-heads turned from the parapet, inclined slightly from the piece, and supported upon a prop.

 

Suspended from the knob of the cas­cable.

 

Containing friction tubes, and the Ian­yard, wound in St. Andrew’s cross upon its handle. Suspended from the knob of the cascable.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

          MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                         245

 

 

 

GUNNER’S-POUCH,

 

 

 

CHOCKS,

 

 

VENT-COVER,

 

TOMPION,

 

BROOM,

 

 

BUDGE-BARREL,

{

{

 

{

{

 

Containing the gunner’s level, breech-sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gun­ner’s gimlet, vent-punch, chalk-line, and chalk. Suspended from the knob of the cascable.

 

One on each side of the piece, laid onthe front of the rails.

 

Covering the vent.

 

In the muzzle.

 

Leaning against the parapet, to the left of’ the piece.

 

Containing cartridges, at the safest and most convenient place in rear of thepiece.

When several columbiads are served together, there will be only one gunner’s level and two vent-punches to each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same bat­tery there will be one worm and one wrench.

The shells are at the magazine, or other safe, position, and are brought, as required, to the place prescribed for the budge-barrel.

1150. The cannoneers having been marched to their posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the colum­biad, its carriage, and the battery.

151. To cause the implements to be distributed, the instructor commands:

 

TAKE IMPLEMENTS.

 

The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable; takes off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the parapet, in rear of his post; gives the tube-pouch to No. 3, and the haversack to No. 4; equips himself with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the latter on the

 

 

 

 

246                                           MANUAL F0R HEAVY ARTILLERY.

 

second finger of the left; hand; takes the elevating-bar, and stepping between the rails, levels the piece conven­iently for loading; applies his level to verify the line of’ sight which is marked on the piece, marking it, if neces­sary, with the chalk line, assisted by No, 2; and resumes his post, holding the elevating-bar with the right hand.

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch.

No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he wears from the right shoulder to the left side.

Nos. 1. 2, 3, and 4 take the truck-handspikes with the hand furthest from the parapet, and carry them to that side, holding them vertically, the arm extended naturally.

152. The instructor causes the service of the piece to be executed by the following commands:

 

1. FROM BATTERY.

 

The gunner moves two paces to the right of his post.

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing from the parapet, place the wrenches on the ends of the axle-trees, the handspikes elevated about 300 to the rear, and at the word HEAVE by the gunner, bear down and throw the wheels into gear; Nos. 3 and 4 immediately after laying their handspikes on the platform in front of their posts.

Nos. 1 and 2, facing from the parapet, embar in the most convenient front mortises of’ the truck-wheels, the hand furthest from the carriage at the top of the handspike, the other hand eight inches lower.

Nos. 3 and 4 go to the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, and, facing towards them, seize the handspikes with both hands between those of Nos. 1 and 2.

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, in applying themselves to the car­riage, to run it from or to battery, break to the rear with the foot nearest to the carriage.

All being ready, the gunner gives the command,

HEAVE.

 

 

 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                       247

 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 act together, and bear upon the handspikes until they are nearly down to the rails, when the gunner commands, UNBAR. Nos. 1 and 2 let go the handspikes with the band nearest to the carriage, and chock the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 withdraw the handspikes and pass them to Nos. 1 and 2, who re-insert them in the front mortises.

The gunner again gives the command, HEAVE, and so on, until the face of the piece is about one yard from the parapet, when ho commands, HALT. Nos. 3 and 4 take their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels as before, unbar, and place the wrench of their handspikes on the ends of the axle-tree of the front wheels. At the com­mand OUT OF GEAR by the gunner, they throw the wheels out of gear; lay their handspikes on the rails between the wheels; and take their posts.

 

2. Load by detail—LOAD.

 

153.Executed as in Nos. 102 and 103. The gunner, if necessary, adjusts the piece conveniently for loading be­fore closing the vent. No.4 brings up a shell, together with the cartridge.

3. SPONGE.

 

154.        Executed as in No. 104.

 

4. RAM.

 

155. Executed as in No. 105, except that the shell is set carefully home without being rammed.

 

5. IN BATTERY.

 

156. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and place the chocks on the ties.

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing towards the parapet, apply the wrenches of their handspikes to the ends of the axle-trees; Nos. land so as to throw the front wheels into

 

 

 

 

248                                             MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY

 

 

gear, and Nos. 3 and 4 so as to throw the rear wheels out of gear.

The gunner commands, HEAVE, when the front wheels are thrown into gear.

Should the carriage run too easily after it is in mo­tion, the gunner will command, REAR WHEELS OUT O’ GEAR, when the rear wheels are thrown out of gear. Nos. 3 and 4 each take a chock and hold it in front of the rear wheels, ready to apply it under them if necessary.

When the head of the cheeks is about one foot from the end of the rails, the gunner commands, CHOCK, when Nos. 3 and 4 chock the rear wheels. The wheels are un-chocked, and the piece is run gently into battery, by Nos. 3 and 4 throwing the rear wheels alternately out of and into gear. As soon as the head of the carriage touches the hurters, the gunner commands, OUT OF GEAR, when the front wheels are thrown out of gear; also the rear wheels, should they be in gear. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 take their posts, and lay their handspikes on the platform just in front of them.

 

6. POINT.

 

157. No. 3 passes the hook of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to rear; holds the handle of the lanyard with the right hand, the hook between the thumb and forefinger; and stands ready to hand it to the gunner.

Nos. 1 and 2, passing outside of the other cannoneers, move to the rear of the chassis, and, each taking one of the manoeuvring handspikes, embar with the levelled end under the traverse wheels. For traversing large angles, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 apply themselves by hand at the end of the chassis.

The gunner withdraws the priming-wire; inserts the pawl of the elevating machine in the proper notch by

 

 

 

 

 

MANUALFOR HEAVY ARTILLERY.                                      249

 

 

means of the elevating bar, and with the breech-sight gives the required elevation; No. 4 turning the handle of the screw according to his direction.

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on the left leg; and gives the word READY,making a signal with both hands, at which Nos. 1 and 2 unbar, lay down the handspikes, and resume their post; receives the tube from No. 3,which he inserts in the vent; dismounts from the chassis; and goes to the windward to observe the effect of the shot.

No. 3 stretches the lanyard as in No. 107.

7.   Number one (or the like)—FIRE.

158. Executed as in No. 108.

What is prescribed in No. 109 will apply to this piece.

159. Remark.—lf the piece is to be fired at high an­gles, it is elevated in the following manner

Nos.1 and 2—the former carrying his traversing hand-spike with him—move to the mule; place the hand-spike in the bore; pass the bight of a trace-rope over it; and bear down slightly on the handspike to enable the gunner to free the pawl from the notch. The gunner draws the pawl back by its handle, and commands EASE AWAY. Nos. 1 and 2, holding the ends of the rope, ease down the breech steadily, until the gunner commands, READY, when he inserts the pawl in the proper notch.

160. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY:

To change posts.

To load for action.

To cease firing.

To secure piece, and replace implements.

To leave the Battery.

 

Executed as in Nos. 111, 112, 113, 114, and 115.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER XIII.

 

AMMUNITION.

 

Troops in the field should not only be supplied with a sufficient quantity of ammunition, but the men of the command should be taught how to prepare it.Cart­ridges for small-arms are made of paper, in the follow­ing manner: Having prepared the paper, which should be strong, but not too thick, by cutting it first into strips eight and a half inches wide, then cutting these strips crosswise into smaller strips four and a half inches in width, and then cutting these last diagonally, so that the pieces will be three inches on one side and five and a half on the other; the pieces are then rolled on a small cylin­drical stick of the same diameter as the ball to be used, about six inches long, having a spherical cavity at one end and rounded at the other. The paper is laid on a table with the side perpendicular to the bases next the workman, the broad end to the left the stick laid on it with the concave end half an inch from the broad edge of the paper, and enveloped in it once. The right hand is then laid flat on the stick, and all the paper rolled on it. The projecting end of the paper is now neatly folded down into the concavity of the stick, pasted, and pressed on a ball imbedded in the table for the purpose.

 

 

 

                       

AMMUNITION.                                                          251

 

 

Instead of being pasted, these cylinders may be closed by choking with a string, tied to the table, and having at the other end a stick by which to hold it. The convex end of the former is placed to the left, and after the paper is rolled on, the former is taken in the left hand, and a turn made around it with the choking string half an inch from, the end of the paper. Whilst the string is drawn tight with the right hand, the former is held in the 1db with the forefinger resting on the end of the cylinder, fold­ing it neatly down upon the end of the former. The choke is then firmly tied with twine.

For ball cartridges, make the cylinders and choke them as above described, and the choke tied without cut­ting the twine. The former is then withdrawn, the ball put in, and the concave end of the former put in after it. The half hitches are made a little above the ball, and the twine cut off.

For ball and buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as before, insert three buckshot, fasten them with a half hitch, and insert and secure the ball as before.

For buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as before, insert four tiers of three buckshot each, as at first, making a half hitch between the tiers, and ending with a double hitch.

To fill the cartridges, the cylinders are placed upright in a box, and the charge poured into each from a conical charger of the appropriate size; the mouths of the cylin­ders are now folded down on the powder by two rectan­gular folds, and the cartridges bundled in packages of ten. For this a folding box is necessary; it is made with two vertical sides at a distance from each other equal to five diameters of the ball, and two diameters high.

The manner of preparing ammunition for artillery is found in the Manual of Artillery in preceding chapter.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

252.                                                           AMMUNITION.                                  

 

TABLE

 

DIMENSIONS OF CARTRIDGE BAGS.

DIMENSIONS, ETC.

 


Cartridge bags for Siege and Garrison service are usually made out of woollen stuff.